Canon SX610 Handleiding
- Categorie
- Camera-accessoires
- Type
- Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
1
ENGLISH
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Camera User Guide
© CANON INC. 2015 CDD-E638-010
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions”
(
=
13) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages.
: Next page
: Previous page
: Page before you clicked a link
● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right.
2
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-6LH*
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Wrist Strap
* Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
2).
Before Use
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of
capacity.
● SD memory cards*
● SDHC memory cards*
● SDXC memory cards*
* Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been
veried to work with the camera.
3
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Conventions in This Guide
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera
buttons and switches on which they appear or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons.
Numbers in brackets correspond to the numbered controls shown in
“Part Names” (
=
4).
[ ] Up button (7) on back
[ ] Left button (8) on back
[ ] Right button (13) on back
[ ] Down button (14) on back
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
=
xx: Pages with related information. (in this example, “xx” represents
a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as
the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate
how the function is used—whether for still images or movies.
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images
were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries
and afliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential
damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory,
including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be
recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable.
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain
from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note
that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright
or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some
commercial settings.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of
camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before
contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision
manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet
design specications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or
may appear as red or black dots. This is not a malfunction. In addition,
this does not affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for protection
against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the lm before
using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become
warm. This does not indicate damage.
4
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
(1)
(2) (3)(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(1) Screen (LCD monitor)
(2) Strap mount
(3) AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
(4) HDMI
TM
terminal
(5) Mode switch
(6) [
(Playback)] button
(7) [
(Auto Zoom)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] /
Up button
(8) [
(Macro)] / Left button
(9) Indicator
(10) [
(Mobile Device Connection)]
button
(11) Movie button
(12) FUNC. (Function) / SET button
(13) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(14) [
(Display)] / Down button
(15) [
(Menu)] button
Part Names
(1)
(2)
(3)(4)(5)(6) (7)(8)
(10)
(9)
(11)
(12) (13) (14)
(1) Lens
(2) Microphone
(3) Speaker
(4) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(5) Shutter button
(6) Lamp
(7) Power button
(8) Wi-Fi antenna area
(9) Flash
(10) [
(Flash pop up)] switch
(11)
(N-Mark)*
(12) Tripod socket
(13) DC coupler terminal cover
(14) Memory card/battery cover
* Used with NFC features (
=
90).
5
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information ..............................................................2
Package Contents .................................................................... 2
Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ................................. 3
Conventions in This Guide ....................................................... 3
Part Names .............................................................................. 4
Common Camera Operations .................................................11
Safety Precautions ................................................................. 13
Basic Guide
Basic Operations.............................................................16
Initial Preparations.................................................................. 16
Attaching the Strap .................................................................... 16
Holding the Camera ...................................................................16
Charging the Battery Pack .........................................................17
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card ............................18
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card .....................18
Setting the Date and Time ......................................................... 19
Changing the Date and Time .................................................19
Display Language ...................................................................... 20
Trying the Camera Out ........................................................... 21
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................21
Viewing ......................................................................................22
Erasing Images .....................................................................23
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics ................................................................24
On/Off ..................................................................................... 24
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) ............................. 25
Power Saving in Shooting Mode ...........................................25
Power Saving in Playback Mode ........................................... 25
Shutter Button ........................................................................ 25
Shooting Display Options ....................................................... 26
Using the FUNC. Menu .......................................................... 26
Using the Menu Screen .......................................................... 27
On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 28
Indicator Display ..................................................................... 29
Clock ...................................................................................... 29
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ......................................30
Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings .......................... 30
Shooting (Smart Auto) ...............................................................30
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode ................................................... 32
Digest Movie Playback ..........................................................32
Still Images/Movies ...............................................................33
Still Images ............................................................................ 33
Movies ...................................................................................33
Scene Icons ............................................................................... 34
Image Stabilization Icons ...........................................................35
On-Screen Frames ....................................................................35
Common, Convenient Features ............................................. 36
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) .......................... 36
Zooming Automatically as the Subject Moves (Auto Zoom) ...... 36
Using the Self-Timer .................................................................. 37
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake ....................... 38
Customizing the Self-Timer ...................................................38
Adding a Date Stamp ................................................................39
6
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips) ...........................................................52
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) ...........52
Shooting in Monochrome ...........................................................53
Special Modes for Other Purposes ........................................ 53
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) ................. 53
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection .....................................53
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer) ..........54
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person
(Face Self-Timer) ...................................................................54
Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter) .................................55
High-Speed Continuous Shooting (High-Speed Burst) .............56
P Mode .............................................................................57
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) ....................................... 57
Image Brightness (Exposure) ................................................. 58
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) ............ 58
Changing the Metering Method .................................................58
Changing the ISO Speed ...........................................................59
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 59
Image Colors .......................................................................... 60
Adjusting White Balance ............................................................60
Custom White Balance .......................................................... 60
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................60
Custom Color.........................................................................61
Shooting Range and Focusing ............................................... 62
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) .....................................................62
Shooting Distant Subjects (Innity) ............................................62
Digital Tele-Converter ................................................................63
Changing the AF Frame Mode ..................................................63
Face AiAF .............................................................................. 63
Continuous Shooting .................................................................40
Image Customization Features .............................................. 40
Changing the Aspect Ratio ........................................................ 40
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) .......... 41
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on
Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) ..................................................41
Red-Eye Correction ...................................................................41
Changing Movie Image Quality .................................................42
Helpful Shooting Features ...................................................... 42
Displaying Grid Lines .................................................................42
Magnifying the Area in Focus ....................................................43
Checking for Closed Eyes .........................................................43
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 44
Deactivating Image Stabilization ...........................................44
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown
before Shooting .....................................................................44
Customizing Camera Operation ............................................. 45
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam ..............................................45
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp ...............................45
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots .......................... 46
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ...................46
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots .........................46
Other Shooting Modes ....................................................47
Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot
(Creative Shot) ....................................................................... 47
Image Display during Playback .................................................48
Choosing Effects .......................................................................48
Specic Scenes ...................................................................... 49
Applying Special Effects ......................................................... 50
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) ............51
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) .............51
7
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Protecting Images .................................................................. 77
Using the Menu .........................................................................77
Choosing Images Individually .................................................... 78
Selecting a Range .....................................................................78
Protecting All Images at Once ...................................................79
Clearing All Protection at Once .............................................79
Erasing Images ...................................................................... 79
Erasing All Images ..................................................................... 80
Choosing a Selection Method ...............................................80
Choosing Images Individually ................................................80
Selecting a Range .................................................................81
Specifying All Images at Once ...............................................81
Rotating Images ..................................................................... 81
Using the Menu .........................................................................82
Deactivating Auto Rotation ........................................................82
Tagging Images as Favorites ................................................. 83
Using the Menu .........................................................................83
Editing Still Images ................................................................. 84
Resizing Images ........................................................................84
Cropping ....................................................................................84
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) ................................85
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) .................................. 86
Correcting Red-Eye ...................................................................86
Editing Movies ........................................................................ 87
Editing Digest Movies ................................................................ 88
Wi-Fi Functions ............................................................... 89
Available Wi-Fi Features ........................................................ 89
Sending Images to a Smartphone .......................................... 90
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone ...............90
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode ......................................................................90
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) .....................64
Center ....................................................................................65
Shooting with Servo AF .........................................................65
Changing the Focus Setting ......................................................66
Flash....................................................................................... 66
Changing the Flash Mode .........................................................66
Auto .......................................................................................67
On ..........................................................................................67
Slow Synchro ........................................................................67
Off .......................................................................................... 67
Other Settings ........................................................................ 67
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) .................... 67
Changing the IS Mode Settings ................................................. 68
Playback Mode ................................................................ 69
Viewing ................................................................................... 69
Switching Display Modes ...........................................................70
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) ......................71
Histogram ..............................................................................71
GPS Information Display .......................................................71
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images
(Digest Movies) ..........................................................................71
Viewing by Date .....................................................................72
Browsing and Filtering Images ............................................... 72
Navigating through Images in an Index ..................................... 72
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions .........................73
Viewing Individual Images in a Group .......................................74
Image Viewing Options .......................................................... 75
Magnifying Images ....................................................................75
Viewing Slideshows ................................................................... 75
Changing Slideshow Settings ................................................76
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe) ....................76
8
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Preparing the Camera ......................................................... 112
Preparing the Computer ...................................................... 112
Sending Images .......................................................................113
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your
Smartphone .........................................................................113
Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control
the Camera............................................................................114
Geotagging Images on the Camera ........................................114
Shooting Remotely .................................................................. 115
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings...........................................116
Editing Connection Information ...............................................116
Changing a Device Nickname ............................................. 116
Erasing Connection Information .......................................... 116
Changing the Camera Nickname ............................................117
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default ................................... 117
Setting Menu .................................................................. 118
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions .......................................118
Silencing Camera Operations ..................................................118
Adjusting the Volume ...............................................................118
Hiding Hints and Tips ...............................................................119
Date and Time .........................................................................119
World Clock .............................................................................119
Lens Retraction Timing ............................................................ 120
Using Eco Mode ......................................................................120
Power-Saving Adjustment .......................................................120
Screen Brightness ...................................................................121
Hiding the Start-Up Screen ......................................................121
Formatting Memory Cards ....................................................... 121
Low-Level Formatting .......................................................... 122
File Numbering ........................................................................122
Date-Based Image Storage ..................................................... 123
Metric / Non-Metric Display .....................................................123
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ..... 92
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button .....................93
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu ............................94
Using Another Access Point ......................................................96
Previous Access Points .............................................................97
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................ 97
Preparing to Register a Computer ............................................. 97
Checking Your Computer Environment .................................97
Installing the Software ...........................................................97
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only) .....................................................................98
Saving Images to a Connected Computer .................................99
Conrming Access Point Compatibility .................................. 99
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points .................................99
Connecting to Listed Access Points ....................................101
Previous Access Points .......................................................102
Sending Images to a Registered Web Service ..................... 103
Registering Web Services .......................................................103
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ..............................103
Registering Other Web Services .........................................105
Uploading Images to Web Services ........................................105
Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer .......... 106
Sending Images to Another Camera .................................... 108
Image Sending Options ........................................................ 109
Sending Multiple Images .........................................................109
Select a range .....................................................................109
Sending Images Tagged as Favorites ................................. 110
Notes on Sending Images ....................................................... 110
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) ........ 111
Adding Comments ................................................................... 111
Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) ........................ 112
Initial Preparations ...................................................................112
9
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Conguring Print Settings ....................................................137
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images ............................137
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images .......................... 138
Setting Up Printing for All Images ........................................138
Clearing All Images from the Print List ................................138
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) .................. 138
Adding Images to a Photobook ...............................................139
Choosing a Selection Method .............................................139
Adding Images Individually ..................................................139
Adding All Images to a Photobook ......................................139
Removing All Images from a Photobook .............................139
Appendix ........................................................................140
Troubleshooting .................................................................... 140
On-Screen Messages........................................................... 144
On-Screen Information ......................................................... 146
Shooting (Information Display) ................................................146
Battery Level .......................................................................146
Playback (Detailed Information Display) ..................................147
Summary of Movie Control Panel ........................................147
Functions and Menu Tables ................................................. 148
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ...........................148
FUNC. Menu ............................................................................149
Shooting Tab ............................................................................151
Set Up Tab ............................................................................... 154
Playback Tab ...........................................................................154
Print Tab ..................................................................................155
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu .................................................. 155
Handling Precautions ........................................................... 155
Specications ....................................................................... 156
Camera Specications .............................................................156
Wi-Fi ....................................................................................156
Checking Certication Logos ................................................... 123
Display Language .................................................................... 123
Adjusting Other Settings .......................................................... 124
Restoring Default Camera Settings ......................................... 124
Accessories ...................................................................125
System Map ......................................................................... 125
Optional Accessories ............................................................ 126
Power Supplies ........................................................................126
Flash Units ...............................................................................127
Other Accessories ...................................................................127
Printers ....................................................................................127
Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 128
Playback on a TV ....................................................................128
Playback on a High-Denition TV ........................................ 128
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV.................................129
Powering the Camera with Household Power ......................... 129
Using the Software ............................................................... 130
Computer Connections via a Cable ......................................... 131
Checking Your Computer Environment ...............................131
Installing the Software .............................................................131
Saving Images to a Computer ................................................. 132
Printing Images .................................................................... 133
Easy Print ................................................................................133
Conguring Print Settings ........................................................ 134
Cropping Images before Printing .........................................135
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing ...............135
Available Layout Options ..................................................... 136
Printing ID Photos ...............................................................136
Printing Movie Scenes ............................................................. 136
Movie Printing Options ........................................................136
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) ..................................137
10
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm lm equivalent) .............156
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time .............. 157
Number of Shots per Memory Card ....................................157
Recording Time per Memory Card ......................................157
Flash Range ........................................................................158
Shooting Range ...................................................................158
Continuous Shooting Speed ................................................158
Shutter Speed .....................................................................158
Aperture ...............................................................................158
Battery Pack NB-6LH ..........................................................158
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE ......................................158
Index..................................................................................... 159
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ........................................ 161
Radio Wave Interference Precautions ..................................... 161
Security Precautions ................................................................161
Trademarks and Licensing ..................................................162
Disclaimer ............................................................................162
11
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Common Camera Operations
Shooting
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode)
-
=
30,
=
32
● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined
settings (Creative Shot Mode)
-
=
47
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
49)
Against Snow
(
=
49)
Matching specic scenes
Low Light
(
=
49)
Fireworks
(
=
49)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
50)
Poster Effect
(
=
50)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
51)
Miniature Effect
(
=
51)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
52)
Monochrome
(
=
53)
● Focus on faces
-
=
30,
=
49,
=
63
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
30,
=
67
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
37,
=
54
● Add a date stamp
-
=
39
● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest)
-
=
32
12
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Save
● Save images to a computer via a cable
-
=
132
Use Wi-Fi Functions
● Send images to a smartphone
-
=
90
● Share images online
-
=
103
● Send images to a computer
-
=
97
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
69
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
75
● On a TV
-
=
128
● On a computer
-
=
131
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
72
● Erase images
-
=
79
Shoot/View Movies
● Shoot movies
-
=
30
● View movies (Playback Mode)
-
=
69
Print
● Print pictures
-
=
133
13
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the
battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Do not look through the viewnder (if your model has one) at intense
light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense articial
light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using the
product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in
electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into
contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately ush with water.
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any
dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power
outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated
capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if
the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact
the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if
your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the
operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate
caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices
is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities.
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions
described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold
accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
This could damage your eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter
(3.3 feet) away from infants when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a
child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when
dropped.
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange
smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to
clean the product.
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects
inside.
14
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make sure to
avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a
clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be
careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not push
the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash with a
cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the
product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using
the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with
tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do
not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to
overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended
periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature
burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot
places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it,
subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other
objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your ngers or
clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery
pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed
for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the
shards of glass may lead to cuts.
15
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and –
terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not
come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it
faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
16
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching the Strap
● Thread the end of the strap through the
strap mount (1), and then pull the other
end of the strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your wrist.
● When shooting, keep your arms close to
your body and hold the camera securely
to prevent it from moving. If you have
raised the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
(1)
(2)
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting
and playback
Basic Guide
17
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
157).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a
commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an
electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage
the battery pack.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to
charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the
battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● After aligning the marks on the battery
pack and charger, insert the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and down (2).
2
Charge the battery pack.
● CB-2LY: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the
charger into a power outlet (2).
● CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the
charger, then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange, and
charging begins.
● When charging is nished, the lamp turns
green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery charger,
remove the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(1)
(2)
(2)
(1)
18
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as
you slide it, until it clicks into the closed
position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
157).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
● Open the cover and press the battery
lock in the direction of the arrow.
● The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
● Push the memory card in until it clicks,
and then slowly release it.
● The memory card will pop up.
(1)
(2)
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted
in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera
(
=
121).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).
2
Insert the battery pack.
● Holding the battery pack with the
terminals (1) facing as shown, press the
battery lock (2) in the direction of the
arrow and insert the battery pack until the
lock clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack facing the
wrong way, it cannot be locked into the
correct position. Always conrm that the
battery pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check the card’s write-protect
switch and insert the memory card.
● Recording is not possible on memory
cards with a write-protect switch when the
switch is in the locked position. Slide the
switch to the unlocked position.
● Insert the memory card with the label (1)
facing as shown until it clicks into place.
● Make sure the memory card is facing the
right way when you insert it. Inserting
memory cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
19
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button when nished.
After a conrmation message, the setting
screen is no longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, press the power
button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ]
tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Date/Time], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
19) to adjust the settings.
● Press the [
] button to close the
menu screen.
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen
is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this
way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when
you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date.
You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (
=
39).
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to specify the
date and time.
● When nished, press the [
] button.
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your
home time zone.
20
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
● The camera has a built-in date/time battery (backup battery).
Date/time settings will be retained for about 3 weeks after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
126), even if the camera is left
off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
19).
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then
immediately press the [ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Once the display language has been set,
the setting screen is no longer displayed.
21
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle).
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway
down. The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and frames are displayed to
indicate image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] appears on the screen,
move the [
] switch to raise the ash. It
will re when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the ash, push it down with your
nger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or
movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button again.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and image
stabilization mode are displayed in the
upper right of the screen.
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
22
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● To view the previous image, press the [ ]
button. To view the next image, press the
[ ] button.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [
][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
● Press the movie button. The camera
beeps once as recording begins, and
[ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed
time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Finish recording.
● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
(1)
23
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
80).
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
● Playback now begins, and after the movie
is nished,
[ ] is displayed.
● To adjust the volume, press the [
][ ]
buttons during playback.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button again.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
24
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
On/Off
Shooting Mode
● Press the power button to turn the
camera on and prepare for shooting.
● To turn the camera off, press the power
button again.
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on and view your shots.
● To turn the camera off, press the [
]
button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
25).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including
shooting and playback options
25
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter
button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all
the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the
button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly to
focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice, and frames are
displayed around image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down. (From the
halfway position, press fully to
shoot.)
● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound
is played.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates
the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specic period of
inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of
inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera
turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when
the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway
(
=
25).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes of
inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
120).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other
devices via Wi-Fi (
=
89), or when connected to a computer
(
=
132).
26
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Using the FUNC. Menu
Congure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode
(
=
149) or playback mode (
=
155).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
menu item (1), and then press the [ ] or
[ ] button.
● Available options (2) are listed next to
menu items, on the right.
● Depending on the menu item, functions
can be specied simply by pressing the
[
] or [ ] button, or another screen is
displayed for conguring the function.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
● Options labeled with a [
] icon can
be congured by pressing the [ ]
button.
● To return to the menu items, press the
[
] button.
(1)
(2)
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen
Information” (
=
146).
Information is displayed
No information is displayed
● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view
function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier
to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image
brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that
any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not
affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes”
(
=
70).
27
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as
follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting
[ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary
depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (
=
151 –
=
155).
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab.
● After you have pressed the [
][ ]
buttons to choose a tab initially, you can
switch between tabs by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed the
[
] button in step 1 is displayed again,
showing the option you congured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
124).
28
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
On-Screen Keyboard
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Wi-Fi connections
(
=
90). Note that the length and type of information you can enter
varies depending on the function you are using.
Entering Characters
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a character, and then press the [ ]
button to enter it.
Moving the Cursor
● Choose [ ] or [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
Deleting Characters
● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button.
The previous character will be deleted.
Conrming Input and Returning to the
Previous Screen
● Press the [ ] button.
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item.
● For menu items with options not shown,
rst press the [
] or [ ] button to switch
screens, and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to select the menu item.
● To return to the previous screen, press
the [
] button.
4
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
5
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
screen displayed before you pressed the
[ ] button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
124).
29
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Clock
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [
] button.
● The current time appears.
● If you hold the camera vertically while
using the clock function, it will switch to
vertical display. Press the [
][ ] buttons
to change the display color.
● Press the [
] button again to cancel the
clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or blinks
depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
On
Connected to a computer (
=
132), or display
off (
=
25,
=
120)
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, shooting long exposures, (
=
55), or
connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
30
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting with Camera-Determined
Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode switch to [ ].
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button again.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking noise
as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene and
image stabilization mode are displayed
in the upper right of the screen
(
=
34,
=
35).
● Frames displayed around any detected
subjects indicate that they are in focus.
Auto Mode /
Hybrid Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting
31
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound
is played, and in low-light conditions
when you have raised the ash, it res
automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the shutter
sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the camera will
revert to the shooting screen.
Recording Movies
1) Start recording.
●
Press the movie button. The camera beeps
once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is
displayed with the elapsed time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen, and the
subject is slightly enlarged. The black
bars indicate image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any detected
faces indicate that they are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your nger
off the movie button.
2) Resize the subject and recompose
the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound of camera
operations will be recorded. Note that
movies shot at zoom factors shown in
blue will look grainy.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will be
automatically adjusted.
(1)
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move
the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto),
and to zoom away from the subject, move
it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom
bar (1) showing the zoom position is
displayed.)
● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] (telephoto)
or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in
or out slowly, move it just a little in the
desired direction.
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
camera beeps twice after focusing, and
frames are displayed to indicate image
areas in focus.
● Several AF frames are displayed when
multiple areas are in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] appears on the screen,
move the [
] switch to raise the ash. It
will re when shooting. If you prefer not
to use the ash, push it down with your
nger, into the camera.
(1)
32
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because
digest movies are recorded for each shot.
● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image
immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [
] mode, or
operating the camera in other ways.
● Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies.
● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed.
● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway
or trigger the self-timer.
● Digest movies are saved as separate movie les in the following
cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [
] mode.
- The digest movie le size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the
total recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59
seconds.
- The digest movie is protected (
=
77).
- Daylight saving time (
=
19) or time zone (
=
119) settings
are changed.
- A new folder is created (
=
123).
● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modied or erased.
● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust
the setting in advance. Choose MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab >
[Digest Type] > [No Stills] (
=
27).
● Individual chapters can be edited (
=
88).
Digest Movie Playback
Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created
on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (
=
71).
3) Finish recording.
● Press the movie button again to stop
recording. The camera beeps twice as
recording stops.
● Recording will stop automatically when
the memory card becomes full.
Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The
camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are
later combined in a digest movie.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode switch to [ ].
2
Compose the shot.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart
Auto)” (
=
30) to compose the shot and
focus.
● For more impressive digest movies,
aim the camera at subjects about four
seconds before shooting still images.
3
Shoot.
● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)”
(
=
30) to shoot a still image.
● The camera records both a still image
and movie clip. The clip, which ends with
the still image and a shutter sound, forms
a single chapter in the digest movie.
33
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Movies
● Before shooting a movie, lower the ash with your nger. Be
careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie.
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (
=
44).
(1)
● Audio recording is monaural.
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the
camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the
[
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to
the subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range”
(
=
158).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
158).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit
when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [
] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot
indicates that shooting is not possible until the ash has nished
recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the ash is ready,
so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or
release it and press it again.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen
is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus,
brightness, and colors used.
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
46).
34
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Background
When Shooting Other Subjects
Icon
Background
Color
Other
Subjects
In Motion*
1
At Close
Range
Bright
Gray
Bright and Backlit
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and
Backlit
Sunsets – Orange
Spotlights
Dark Blue
Dark
Dark, Using
Tripod
*
2
– –
*1 Not displayed for movies.
*2 Displayed in dark scenes when the camera is held still, as when mounted on a
tripod.
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
57) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera
are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color.
Background
When Shooting People
Icon
Background
Color
People In Motion*
1
Shadows on
Face*
1
Bright
Gray
Bright and Backlit
–
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and
Backlit
–
Spotlights
Dark Blue
Dark
Dark, Using
Tripod
*
2
– –
35
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera
detects subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face)
determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects
within a certain range to keep them in focus.
However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white
frame will remain on the screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera
detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus
and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
57) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically
applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in
[ ] and [ ] modes.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ]
is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is
used (Hybrid IS).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as
when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on
a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract
wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you
follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical
camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow
subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera
shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
44). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
● In [
] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed.
36
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear
grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording
pixel settings (
=
41), the maximum zoom factor can be
achieved by following step 1.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab >
[Digital Zoom] > [Off].
Zooming Automatically as the Subject Moves
(Auto Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face
(
=
30) at a constant size. If the person moves closer, the camera
automatically zooms out, and vice versa.
Common, Convenient Features
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
Still Images
Movies
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom,
use digital zoom for up to about 72x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward [ ].
● Hold the lever until zooming stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor
before the image becomes noticeably
grainy, which is then indicated on the
screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward [ ]
again.
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
● The camera zooms in even closer on the
subject.
(1)
37
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● If the person whose face is detected moves toward the edge of
the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in view.
● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter
button all the way down in self-timer mode (
=
37).
● In order to display the subject on the screen consistently when
the subject is moving or in certain shooting conditions, the face
may not be displayed at a constant size.
● When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level
and stops zooming until a face is detected.
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other
timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the
shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
26).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
1
Enter Auto Zoom mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● A white frame is displayed around the
detected face, and the camera zooms in
and out automatically to keep the subject
on the screen.
● If more than one face is detected, a
white frame is displayed around the
main subject’s face and gray frames
are displayed around up to two more
faces. The camera zooms in and out
automatically to keep the subjects on the
screen.
2
Shoot.
● Even after your shot, the frame is still
displayed and the camera continues to
zoom automatically.
● Press the [
] button again. [ ] is
displayed and Auto Zoom is disabled.
● Faces may not be detected at some zoom factors, or if the
subject’s head is tilted or facing the camera indirectly.
● You can also zoom in or out with the zoom lever, but the original
zoom factor will be restored in a few seconds after you release
the lever.
● Auto Zoom is disabled in the following situations.
- When changing shooting modes
- When the [
] button, movie button, or [ ] are pressed
- When [
] is pressed while the ash is raised
38
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
37), choose [ ] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
delay or number of shots.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose a
value, and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
37) to shoot.
● For movies shot using the self-timer, the delay setting represents
the delay before recording begins, but the shots setting has no
effect.
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter button
halfway to focus on the subject, and then
press it all the way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie button.
● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp
will blink and the camera will play a self-
timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking
and sound will speed up. (The lamp will
remain lit in case the ash res.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting, choose [
]
in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you
have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are
pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
37) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer”
(
=
37) to shoot.
39
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one
as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already
have one may cause it to be printed twice.
- Print using printer functions (
=
133)
- Use camera DPOF print settings (
=
137) to print
Adding a Date Stamp
Still Images
Movies
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right
corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so conrm
beforehand that the date and time are correct (
=
19).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Date
Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● As you take shots, the camera adds the
shooting date or time to the lower-right
corner of images.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
40
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● Once the setting is complete, the screen
aspect ratio will be updated.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices.
This is the same aspect ratio as 35 mm lm. It is used for printing
images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on
standard-denition televisions or similar display devices. Also
used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
● Not available in [ ] mode.
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot
continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting
Speed” (
=
158).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and then choose [ ] (
=
26).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, focus, exposure and color are locked
at the position/level determined when you pressed the shutter
button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
37).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
41
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Red-Eye Correction
Still Images
Movies
Red-eye that occurs in ash photography can be automatically corrected
as follows.
1
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
27).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then
choose [On] (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than
eyes (if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils,
for example).
● You can also correct existing images (
=
86).
● You can also access the screen in step 2 when the ash is up by
pressing the [
] button and immediately pressing the [ ]
button.
Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image
Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on
how many shots at each recording pixel setting can t on a memory card,
see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
157).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting
Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
● Not available in [ ] mode.
42
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Helpful Shooting Features
Displaying Grid Lines
Still Images
Movies
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal
reference while shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Grid
Lines] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[On] (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, grid lines
are displayed on the screen.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
3 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum
movie length at each level of image quality that will t on a memory card,
see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (
=
157).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [
].
Image
Quality
Recording
Pixels
Frame Rate Details
1920 x 1080 30 fps For shooting in Full HD
1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in standard
denition
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, black bars are displayed on the top and
bottom edges of the screen. These image areas are not recorded.
43
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed
their eyes.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink
Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
27).
2
Shoot.
● [ ] ashes when the camera detects a
person whose eyes are closed.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
46).
● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode
(
=
40).
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will
enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-
Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [On] (
=
27).
2
Check the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway. The
face detected as the main subject is now
magnied.
● To restore the original setting, choose
[Off] in step 1.
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
36)
- When Tracking AF is used (
=
64)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
128)
● Not available in [
] mode.
44
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size
Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant camera
shake.
Reducing the effect of image stabilization enables you to shoot subjects at
the same size shown before shooting.
● Follow the steps in “Changing the IS
Mode Settings” (
=
44) to access the
[IS Settings] screen.
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose
[2] (
=
27).
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
● [Dynamic IS] cannot be selected when [IS Mode] is set to [Off]
(
=
44).
● For [
], [Dynamic IS] is xed on [1].
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
Deactivating Image Stabilization
You should set the image stabilization function to [Off] when using a tripod
or other means to secure the camera.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
27).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [IS
Mode], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [Off].
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions
is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (
=
35).
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
45
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce
red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Settings] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash
Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press
the [ ] button (
=
27).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then
choose [Off] (
=
27).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as
follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
27).
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Still Images
Movies
The lamp (front) lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter
button halfway in low-light conditions. If you prefer, you can deactivate this
lamp.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF-
assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
27).
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [On].
46
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (=
46).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Display Info], and then choose
the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
147).
● When [Display Time] (
=
46) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. By pressing the [
]
button, you can do the following operations.
- Protect (
=
77)
- Favorites (
=
83)
- Erase (
=
79)
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what information is
displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image after
shooting] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
27).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Display Time], and then choose
the desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat this
process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec.,
4 sec.,
8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even while the
shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing
the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
47
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Enjoying a Variety of Images from
Each Shot (Creative Shot)
Still Images
Movies
The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically
applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the
subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture
multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode switch to [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the way
down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is
played three times.
● After the six images are displayed
in succession, they are displayed
simultaneously for about two seconds.
● To keep the images displayed until you
press the shutter button halfway, press
the [
] button. For full-screen display in
this state, choose an image by pressing
the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press
the [ ] button.
● To return to the original display, press the
[
] button.
● Shooting will take some time when the ash res, but hold the
camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times.
● The six images are managed together as a group (
=
74).
● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only
available immediately after you shoot.
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with
unique image effects or captured using special functions
48
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Choosing Effects
Still Images
Movies
You can choose effects for images captured in [ ] mode.
● After choosing [
] mode, press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
effect, and then press the [ ] button.
Auto
All effects
Retro
Images resemble old photos
Monochrome
Images are generated in one color
Special
Bold, distinctive-looking images
Natural
Subdued, natural-looking images
Image Display during Playback
The six images from each shot are managed together as a group, and
only the rst image in the series is displayed during playback. To indicate
that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of
the screen.
● If you erase a grouped image (
=
79), all images in the group
are also erased. Be careful when erasing images.
● Grouped images can be played back individually (
=
74) and
ungrouped (
=
74).
● Protecting (
=
77) a grouped image will protect all images in
the group.
● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back
using Image Search (
=
72) or Smart Shufe (
=
76). In this
case, images are temporarily ungrouped.
● The following actions are not available for grouped images:
magnifying (
=
75), tagging as favorites (
=
83), editing
(
=
84), printing (
=
133), setting up individual image printing
(
=
137), or adding to a photobook (
=
139). To do these
things, either view grouped images individually (
=
74) or
cancel grouping (
=
74) rst.
● Simultaneous display as shown in step 2 is only available
immediately after you shoot.
49
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting under Low Light (Low
Light)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot with minimal camera and subject
shake even in low-light conditions.
Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds
(Snow)
Still Images
Movies
● Bright, natural-colored shots of people
against snowy backgrounds.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
● Vivid shots of reworks.
● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes.
● In [
] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed
(
=
59) is increased to suit the shooting conditions.
● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [
] mode, hold it
steady while shooting.
● In [
] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions
may prevent you from obtaining the desired results.
● In [
] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
44).
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Set the mode switch to [ ].
2
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in
the menu, and then choose a shooting
mode (
=
26).
3
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a softening
effect.
Shooting Evening Scenes without
Using a Tripod (Handheld Night
Scene)
Still Images
Movies
● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or
portraits with evening scenery in the
background, without the need to hold the
camera very still (as with a tripod).
● A single image is created by combining
consecutive shots, reducing camera
shake and image noise.
50
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) to choose a shooting mode.
2
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster or
illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ]
mode instead of [
] mode will give better results (
=
30).
● [
] mode recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and cannot
be changed.
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
51
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above
and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by
choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and
objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is
not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
● A white frame is displayed, indicating the
image area that will not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame,
and press the [
][ ] buttons to move it.
3
For movies, choose the movie
playback speed.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
speed.
4
Return to the shooting screen and
shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to return to the
shooting screen, and then shoot.
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose an effect level, and
then press the [ ] button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
52
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera
Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting
(darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a color tone, and then
press the [ ] button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for
One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
Movies are played back at 30 fps.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ]
buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation,
press the [
][ ] buttons.
● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the
[
][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical
orientation, press the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
40). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
53
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart
Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Auto Shooting after Smile Detection
The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you
pressing the shutter button.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Smile Detection on] is
displayed.
2
Aim the camera at a person.
● Each time the camera detects a smile, it
will shoot after the lamp lights up.
● To pause smile detection, press the
[
] button. Press the [ ] button again to
resume detection.
● Switch to another mode when you nish shooting, or the camera
will continue shooting each time a smile is detected.
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a color tone, and then
press the [ ] button.
● A preview is shown of how your shot will
look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
54
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Face the camera and wink.
● The camera will shoot about two seconds
after detecting a wink by the person
whose face is inside the frame.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately.
● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat,
or glasses.
● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as
a wink.
● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds
later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
43) is only
available for the nal shot.
● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person
enters the shooting area and winks.
Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face Self-
Timer)
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of
another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area
(
=
63). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar
shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button.
● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face
the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are
visible.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
43) is only
available for the nal shot.
Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)
Still Images
Movies
Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way
down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face of the person who will
wink.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Wink to take picture] is
displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
55
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Specify a shutter speed of 1 – 15 seconds to shoot long exposures. In this
case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to prevent
camera shake.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
2
Choose the shutter speed.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired shutter
speed (
=
26).
3
Check the exposure.
● Press the shutter button halfway to view
the exposure for your selected shutter
speed.
4
Shoot.
● On-screen image brightness in step 3, when you pressed the
shutter button halfway, may not match the brightness of your
shots.
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● Set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to
secure the camera (
=
44).
2
Compose the shot and press the
shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is displayed
around the face you focus on and white
frames around other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all the way
down.
● The camera now enters shooting standby
mode, and [Look straight at camera to
start count down] is displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound
is played.
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
● After the camera detects a new face, the
lamp blinking and self-timer sound will
speed up. (When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds later,
the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, press the [
][ ] buttons
after choosing [
] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (
=
43) is only
available for the nal shot.
56
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● If the ash res, your shot may be overexposed. In this case, set
the ash to [
] and shoot again (
=
66).
High-Speed Continuous Shooting (High-Speed
Burst)
Still Images
Movies
You can shoot a series of shots in rapid succession by holding the shutter
button all the way down. For details on the continuous shooting speed,
see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (
=
158).
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way down
to shoot continuously.
● The recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and cannot be
changed.
● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the rst
shot.
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
57
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting
style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
49) and choose [ ].
2
Customize the settings as desired
(=
58 – =
68), and then shoot.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
59) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
66),
which may enable adequate exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
26) and MENU
(
=
27) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply when the mode switch set to [ ] and
mode to [ ].
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than
[
], make sure the function is available in that mode (
=
148).
58
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including backlit
shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the
shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light across
the entire image area, calculated by treating
brightness in the central area as more important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot AE
Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen.
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure
Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop
increments, in a range of –2 to +2.
● Press the [
] button and choose [ ]
in the menu. As you watch the screen,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust
brightness (
=
26).
● The correction level you specied is now
displayed.
59
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or
backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal
brightness. Insufcient overall image contrast can also be automatically
corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Auto] (
=
27).
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
● You can also correct existing images (
=
86).
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
80, 100, 200 For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
400, 800 For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight.
1600, 3200 For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms.
Higher ISO speeds give higher sensitivity, and lower speeds give lower
sensitivity.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
60
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white
balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white
balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (
=
60) to choose [ ].
● Aim the camera at a plain white subject,
so that the entire screen is white. Press
the [
] button.
● The tint of the screen changes once the
white balance data has been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia
or black and white.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Image Colors
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more
natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance for
the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
60).
61
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Follow the steps in “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
60) to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
an item, and then specify the value by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● For stronger/more intense effects (or
darker skin tones), adjust the value to
the right, and for weaker/lighter effects
(or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to
the left.
● Press the [
] button to complete
the setting.
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color saturation,
making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color saturation for
subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid
Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet
natural-looking colors resembling images on
positive lm.
Lighter Skin
Tone
Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin
Tone
Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky,
ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation,
and other qualities as desired (
=
61).
● White balance (
=
60) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
62
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting Distant Subjects (Innity)
To restrict the focus to distant subjects, set the camera to [ ]. For details
on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (
=
158).
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (
=
158).
● Press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
] is
displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● When the zoom position is within the range of the yellow bar
below the zoom bar, [
] turns gray and the camera cannot focus.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
38).
63
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as
follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [AF
Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
the desired option (
=
27).
Face AiAF
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative
metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed
around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main
subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other
detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are
displayed around faces in focus.
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or
2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster
than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the
same zoom factor.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose the desired option (
=
27).
● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor
is displayed on the screen.
● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(
=
36) or AF-point zoom (
=
43).
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following
step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)”
(
=
36).
64
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2
Choose a subject to focus on.
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the
desired subject, and then press the [ ]
button.
● When the subject is detected, the camera
beeps and [
] is displayed. Even if the
subject moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a certain range.
● If no subject is detected, [
] is displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [
] button
again.
3
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ]
changes to a blue [ ], which follows
the subject as the camera continues to
adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF)
(
=
65).
● Press the shutter button all the way down
to shoot.
● Even after your shot, [
] is still displayed
and the camera continues to track the
subject.
● [Servo AF] (
=
65) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab is not available.
● [
] and [ ] are not available.
● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (
=
65) is set to [On],
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1
Choose [Tracking AF].
● Follow the steps in “Changing the AF
Frame Mode” (
=
63) to choose
[Tracking AF].
● [
] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
65
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the
camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long
as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [Servo
AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
27).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are maintained
where the blue AF frame is displayed
while you are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF frame mode.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed
and aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
27) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
37).
● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [
] button. After your shot,
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
Center
Still Images
Movies
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set
[AF Frame Size] on the [
] tab to [Small] (
=
27).
● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital
zoom (
=
36) or digital tele-converter (
=
63).
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
43) set to [On].
66
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For details
on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
158).
1
Raise the ash.
● Move the [ ] switch.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose a ash mode, and then
press the [ ] button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button
when the ash is lowered. Move the [
] switch to raise the ash,
then congure the setting.
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on
subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed.
Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the
shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then
choose [Off] (
=
27).
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because
the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the
shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus
constantly.
67
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as
follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can
t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (
=
157).
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a
slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
44).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it
still.
68
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
● Choose [Shoot Only] in steps 1 – 2
of “Deactivating Image Stabilization”
(
=
44).
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
● The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
69
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as
follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● To view the previous image, press the [ ]
button. To view the next image, press the
[ ] button.
● To access this screen (Scroll Display
mode), press and hold the [
][ ] buttons
for at least one second. In this mode,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse
through images.
● To return to single-image display, press
the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by shooting
date, press the [
][ ] buttons in Scroll
Display mode.
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [
] button to
enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were
renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other
cameras.
70
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab
> [Scroll Display] > [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab > [Resume] > [Last
shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
27) and choose your desired effect on the [ ] tab >
[Transition].
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide
the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback
(Detailed Information Display)” (
=
147).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
● Movies are identied by a [
] icon.
To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ] button,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button again.
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
● To adjust the volume when the volume
indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback, press the
[ ] button.
● After the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
(1)
71
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time
Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting
Still Images (Digest Movies)
Still Images
Movies
View digest movies recorded automatically in [ ] mode (
=
32) on a
day of still image shooting.
1
Choose an image.
● Still images shot in [ ] mode are
labeled with [ ] icon.
2
Play the digest movie.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[
] in the menu (
=
26).
● The digest movie created on the day of
still image shooting is played back, from
the beginning.
● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when
you are using the camera with information display deactivated
(
=
70).
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
70).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● The graph in detailed information display
(
=
70) is a histogram showing the
distribution of brightness in the image.
The horizontal axis represents the degree
of brightness, and the vertical axis, how
much of the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram is a
way to check exposure.
GPS Information Display
Still Images
Movies
● Using a smartphone connected to the
camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images
on the camera, adding information such
as latitude, longitude, and elevation
(
=
114). You can review this information
in the GPS information display.
● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC
(shooting date and time) are listed from
top to bottom.
● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this
information.
● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available
on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly.
72
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the images
you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to
display images in an index. Moving the
lever again will increase the number of
images shown.
● To display fewer images, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. Fewer images are
shown each time you move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image.
● An orange frame is displayed around the
selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the selected
image in single-image display.
Viewing by Date
Digest movies can be viewed by date.
1
Choose a movie.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/
Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose a date (
=
27).
2
Play the movie.
● Press the [ ] button to start playback.
73
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in step 2.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
72), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
75), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
75). You
can protect, erase, or print all images found or add them to
a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in
“Protecting Images” (
=
77), “Erasing All Images” (
=
80),
“Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
137), or “Adding
Images to a Photobook” (
=
139).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
84 –
=
88), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by ltering
image display according to your specied conditions. You can also protect
(
=
77) or delete (
=
79) these images all at once.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Shot Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
83).
Still Image/
Movie
Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in
[
] mode (
=
32).
1
Choose a search condition.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose a condition (
=
26).
● When you have selected [
] or [ ],
choose the condition by pressing the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen
displayed, and then press the [ ] button.
2
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions are
displayed in yellow frames. To view only
these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
● To cancel ltered display, choose [
] in
step 1.
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
74
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● During group playback (step 3), you can use the menu functions
accessed by pressing the [
] button. You can also browse
through images quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index”
(
=
72) and magnify them “Magnifying Images” (
=
75). By
choosing [All Images in Group] for “Protecting Images” (
=
77),
“Erasing All Images” (
=
80), “Adding Images to the Print List
(DPOF)” (
=
137), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
139),
all images in the group can be manipulated at once.
● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still
images, choose MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab > [Group Images] >
[Off] (
=
27). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped
during individual playback.
● In [
] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying
a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (
=
47) is
only shown immediately after you shoot.
Viewing Individual Images in a Group
Still Images
Movies
Images shot in [ ] or [ ] mode (
=
47,
=
56) are grouped, and
only the rst image is displayed. However, you can also view the images
individually.
1
Choose a grouped image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image labeled with [ ].
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
26).
3
View images in the group
individually.
● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons will display
only images in the group.
● To cancel group playback, press the [
]
button, choose [ ] in the menu, and
press the [ ] button again (
=
26).
75
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each
image is displayed for about three seconds.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ] in the
menu, and choose the desired option
(
=
26).
● The slideshow will start after [Loading
image] is displayed for a few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop the
slideshow.
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
25) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][ ]
buttons down.
● In ltered display (
=
73), only images matching search
conditions are played.
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will
zoom in and magnify the image, and
[ ] is displayed. You can magnify
images up to about 10x by continuing to
hold the zoom lever.
● The approximate position of the displayed
area (1) is shown for reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom lever
toward [
]. You can return to single-
image display by continuing to hold it.
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● While [
] is displayed, you can
switch to [ ] by pressing the [ ]
button. To switch to other images while
zoomed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. Press
the [ ] button again to restore the
original setting.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
(1)
76
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shufe)
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may
wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera
offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in
an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in
many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shufe.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
26).
● Four candidate images are displayed.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the image you want to view next.
● Your chosen image is displayed in the
center, surrounded by the next four
candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [
] button. To restore
the original display, press the [ ] button
again.
● Press the [
] button to restore
single-image display.
● Smart Shufe is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Images are shown in ltered display (
=
73)
- During group playback (
=
74)
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions
between images and the display duration of each image.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab
(
=
27).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose a menu item to congure, and
then choose the desired option (
=
27).
● To start the slideshow with your settings,
choose [Start] and press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● [Play Time] cannot be modied when [Bubble] is chosen in
[Effect].
77
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Protect] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
27).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (
=
79).
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
26). [Protected]
is displayed.
● To cancel protection, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
121,
=
122).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
78
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
77), choose [Select Range] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last
image], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● Images before the rst image cannot be
selected as the last image.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
77), choose [Select] and press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
[ ] is displayed.
● To cancel protection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
79
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful
when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
77) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
26).
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and
then press the [ ] button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Cancel], and then
press the [ ] button.
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect],
and then press the [ ] button.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in
step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
77), choose [Protect All Images]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting
All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
80
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
80), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image following
step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually”
(
=
78), [ ] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
3
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Erasing All Images
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected
images (
=
77) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an option as
desired (
=
27).
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
81
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
26).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending
on the desired direction. Each time you
press the button, the image is rotated
90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the
setting.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
80), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
78) to specify images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase],
and then press the [ ] button.
Specifying All Images at Once
1
Choose [Select All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection
Method” (
=
80), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
82
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates
images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button, choose [Auto
Rotate] on the [ ] tab, and then choose
[Off] (
=
27).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
81) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
● In Smart Shufe (
=
76) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Rotate] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● The image is rotated 90° each time you
press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen, press the
[
] button.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
82).
83
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
[ ] is displayed.
● To cancel protection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
3
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button. A conrmation
message is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( )
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies.)
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a
category in ltered playback, you can restrict the following operations to
all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
69), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
75), “Protecting
Images” (
=
77), “Erasing Images” (
=
79), “Adding Images to
the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
137), “Adding Images to a Photobook”
(
=
139)
● Press the [
] button, and then choose
[ ] in the menu (
=
26).
● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
● To cancel protection, repeat this process
and choose [
] again, and then press
the [ ] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Favorites] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
84
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Save the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
5
Review the new image.
● Press the [ ] button. [Display new
image?] is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (
=
41).
● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels.
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab
(
=
27).
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
84 –
=
86) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels.
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Resize] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
size, and then press the [ ] button.
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
85
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a
separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors)” (
=
60).
1
Choose [My Colors].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab
(
=
27).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
84).
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be
a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the
desired color.
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
60).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Adjust the cropping area.
● A frame is displayed around the portion of
the image to be cropped (1).
● The original image is shown in the upper
left, and a preview of the image as
cropped (2) is shown in the lower right.
You can also see the number of recording
pixels after cropping (3).
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
84).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting
of [
] (
=
41) or resized to [ ] (
=
84).
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than
uncropped images.
(1) (2) (3)
86
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the
corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ]
tab (
=
27).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera is now
corrected, and frames are displayed
around corrected image areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as needed.
Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images”
(
=
75).
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be
detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufcient
overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects
stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the
image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
● Press the [ ] button, and then
choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab
(
=
27).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
84).
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
87
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of
movies.
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
69), choose [ ] and press the [ ]
button.
● The movie editing panel and editing bar
are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is
the editing bar.
● Press the [
] [ ] buttons to choose [ ]
or [ ].
● To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen), press
the [ ][ ] buttons to move [ ]. Cut the
beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by
choosing [ ], and cut the end of the
movie by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] to a position other than a
[ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the
nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut,
while in [ ] the portion after the nearest
[ ] mark on the right will be cut.
(1)
(2)
4
Save as a new image and review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a new le.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images”
(
=
84).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
88
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Playback Mode
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button. The edited
movie is now played.
● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [ ]. Press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button
again.
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[New File], and then press the [ ] button.
● The movie is now saved as a new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be
erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
126).
Editing Digest Movies
Still Images
Movies
Individual chapters (clips) (
=
32) recorded in [ ] mode can be
erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot
be recovered.
1
Select the clip to erase.
● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short
Movies Created When Shooting Still
Images (Digest Movies)” (
=
71) to
play a movie created in [ ] mode, and
then press the [ ] button to access the
movie control panel.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [ ] or
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The selected clip is played back
repeatedly.
3
Conrm erasure.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The clip is erased, and the short movie is
overwritten.
● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is
connected to a printer.
89
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Available Wi-Fi Features
You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by
connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi.
● Smartphones and Tablets
Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi
functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a
smartphone or tablet.
For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other
compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”.
● Computer
Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
Wi-Fi.
● Web Services
Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to
send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera
can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY.
● Printers
Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting
DPS over IP) to print them.
● Another Camera
Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras.
Wi-Fi Functions
Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible
devices, and use the camera with Web services
● Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
Precautions” (
=
161).
90
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible
Smartphone
Using an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later)
simplies the process of installing Camera Connect and connecting the
devices via NFC.
Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on
the camera mode when the devices are touched together.
● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched
together, you can choose and send images on the image selection
screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely
and geotag your shots (
=
114). It’s easy to reconnect to recent
devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu.
● If the camera is in playback mode when the devices are touched
together a screen showing a list of images to be sent is displayed, so
you can choose and send images.
Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection
to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode.
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in
Shooting Mode
1
Install Camera Connect.
● Activate NFC on the smartphone and
touch the devices N-Mark ( ) together
to start Google Play on the smartphone
automatically. Once the Camera Connect
download page is displayed, download
and install the app.
Sending Images to a Smartphone
There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send
images.
● Connect via NFC (
=
90)
Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0
or later) against the camera to connect the devices.
● Connect to a device assigned to the [
] button (
=
93)
Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplies
sending images to a smartphone (
=
93). Note that only one
smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button.
● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (
=
94)
You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it
to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added.
Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated
Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application
(supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon
website.
● If you have a Wi-Fi compatible Canon camera, and connect
the camera and a smartphone over a Wi-Fi connection, we
recommend changing your smartphone application from
CameraWindow to Camera Connect.
91
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button. You
can also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
2
Establish the connection.
● Make sure the camera is off or in
Shooting mode.
● Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed against
the camera’s N-Mark.
● The camera starts up automatically.
● After [Device Nickname] is displayed,
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Camera Connect is started on the
smartphone.
● The camera and smartphone are
connected automatically.
3
Adjust the privacy setting.
● After this screen is displayed, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then
press the [ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
92
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback
Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Touch the N-Mark (
) on the smartphone
with Camera Connect installed (
=
90)
against the camera’s N-Mark.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, and then press the [ ]
button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose additional
images.
● After you nish choosing images, press
the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● The image is sent. The connection is
ended automatically after the image is
sent.
● If during connection a message on the camera requests you to
enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Sending Images to an NFC-
Compatible Smartphone” (
=
90) to enter it.
● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect
to via NFC in Playback mode.
● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (
=
109).
● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind.
- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This
may damage the devices.
- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize
each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices
together in slightly different positions. If connection is not
established, keep the devices together until the camera screen
is updated.
- If you try to connect while the camera is turned off, a message
may be displayed on the smartphone screen asking for the
camera to be turned on. Turn the camera on again, and then
touch the devices together again.
- Do not place other objects between the camera and
smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or
similar accessories may block communication.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 3.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
116).
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in
step 2 (
=
91).
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
109).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab
> [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off].
93
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
4
Connect the smartphone to the
network.
● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Start Camera Connect.
● Start Camera Connect on the
smartphone.
● After the camera recognizes the
smartphone, a device selection screen is
displayed.
Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button
Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ]
button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for
viewing and saving camera images on your connected device.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
96).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, nd
Camera Connect in the App Store and
download and install the app.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Device Nickname] is displayed,
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
94
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
96).
1
Install Camera Connect.
● For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, nd
Camera Connect in the App Store and
download and install the app.
● For Android smartphones, nd Camera
Connect in Google Play and download
and install the app.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● If the [Device Nickname] screen is
displayed, choose [OK] (
=
93).
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
6
Choose the smartphone to connect
to.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
smartphone, and then press the [ ]
button.
● After a connection is established with
the smartphone, the smartphone name
is displayed on the camera. (This screen
will close in about one minute.)
7
Import images.
● Use the smartphone to import images
from the camera to the smartphone.
● Use the smartphone to end the
connection; the camera will automatically
turn off.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in
step 2 (
=
93).
● For better security, you can display a password on the screen in
step 3 by accessing MENU (
=
27) and choosing [ ] tab >
[Wi-Fi Settings] > [Password] > [On]. In this case, in the password
eld on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password displayed
on the camera.
● One smartphone can be registered to the [
] button. To assign a
different one, rst clear the current one in MENU (
=
27) > [ ]
tab > [Mobile Device Connect Button].
● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark (
). For
details, refer to the smartphone user manual.
95
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
6
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button. You
can also use the smartphone to end the
connection.
● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the
above procedure starting from step 1.
● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected
smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera
images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the
smartphone, choose [No] in step 5.
● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy
settings for it on the camera (
=
116).
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
● Choose the smartphone to connect to,
as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
93).
5
Adjust the privacy setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now use the smartphone to
browse, import, or geotag images on the
camera or shoot remotely.
96
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Using Another Access Point
When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or
through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point.
1
Prepare for the connection.
● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen
by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending
to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
93) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
94).
2
Connect the smartphone to the
access point.
3
Choose [Switch Network].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Switch Network], and then press the [ ]
button.
● A list of detected access points will be
displayed.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
109).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 6.
97
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Saving Images to a Computer
Preparing to Register a Computer
Checking Your Computer Environment
The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following
operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility
information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon
website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later
● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported.
● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version)
require a separate download and installation of Windows Media
Feature Pack.
For details, check the following website.
http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
● Access the site for your country or region.
● Download the software.
4
Connect to the access point and
choose the smartphone.
● For WPS-compatible access points,
connect to the access point and choose
the smartphone as described in steps
5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access
Points” (
=
99).
● For non-WPS access points, follow steps
2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access
Points” (
=
101) to connect to the
access point and choose the smartphone.
5
Congure the privacy settings and
send images.
● Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a
Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu”
(
=
94) to congure the privacy
settings and send images.
Previous Access Points
To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in
“Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (
=
93) or step 4 in
“Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
94).
● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the
screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose
[Camera Access Point Mode].
● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from
step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
96).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the
procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (
=
96) from step 4.
98
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2
Congure the setting.
● Click in the following order: [Start] menu
>
[All Programs]
>
[Canon Utilities]
>
[CameraWindow]
>
[Wi-Fi connection
setup].
● In the application that opens, follow the
on-screen instructions and congure the
setting.
● The following Windows settings are congured when you run the
utility in step 2.
- Turn on media streaming.
This will enable the camera to see (nd) the computer to access
via Wi-Fi.
- Turn on network discovery.
This will enable the computer to see (nd) the camera.
- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).
This allows you to check the network connection status.
- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP).
This will enable network devices to detect each other
automatically.
● Some security software may prevent you from completing the
settings as described here. Check the settings of your security
software.
2
Install the les.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process.
● Installation may take some time,
depending on computer performance and
the Internet connection.
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
● Follow the steps below to uninstall (delete) the software.
- In Windows, click in the following order: [Start] menu
>
[All
Programs]
>
[Canon Utilities], and then choose the software you
want to uninstall.
- In Mac OS, click on [Applications] folder
,
choose the [Canon
Utilities] folder, and then drag the folder of the software you
want to uninstall to the trash.
Conguring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection
(Windows Only)
On a computer running Windows, congure the following settings before
connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking your network
connection, refer to the computer user
manual.
99
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on
checking settings, refer to the access point user manual.
● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for
connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal
Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”.
● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access
points”.
● If you use MAC address ltering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure
to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can
check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (
=
27)
> [
] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC Address].
Using WPS-Compatible Access Points
WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over
Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Conguration Method or PIN
Method for settings on a WPS supported device.
1
Conrm that the computer is
connected to an access point.
● For instructions on checking the
connection, refer to the device and
access point user manuals.
2
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
Saving Images to a Connected Computer
Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows.
Also refer to the access point user manual.
Conrming Access Point Compatibility
Conrm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi
standards (“Wi-Fi” (
=
156)).
Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point
supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS,
=
99) or not (
=
101). For
non-WPS access points, check the following information.
● Network name (SSID/ESSID)
The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the
“access point name” or “network name”.
● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method /
encryption mode)
The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check
which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK
(TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system
authentication), or no security.
● Password (encryption key / network key)
The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also
called the “encryption key” or “network key”.
● Key index (transmit key)
The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data
encryption. Use “1” as the setting.
● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network
settings, contact the system administrator for details.
● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise
adequate caution when changing these settings.
100
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
7
Establish the connection.
● On the access point, hold down the WPS
connection button for a few seconds.
● On the camera, press the [
] button to
go to the next step.
● The camera connects to the access point
and lists devices connected to it on the
[Select a Device] screen.
8
Choose the target device.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
target device name, and then press the
[
] button.
9
Install a driver (rst Windows
connection only).
● When this screen is displayed on the
camera, click the Start menu on the
computer, click [Control Panel], and then
click [Add a device].
● Double-click the connected camera icon.
● Driver installation will begin.
● After driver installation is complete, and
the camera and computer connection
is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be
displayed. Nothing will be displayed on
the camera screen.
● After [Device Nickname] is displayed,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [WPS Connection].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[WPS Connection], and then press the
[ ] button.
6
Choose [PBC Method].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [PBC
Method], and then press the [ ] button.
101
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in
step 2 (
=
100).
● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen
is blank.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera.
● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed
on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point.
Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further
details, refer to the user manual included with your access point.
Connecting to Listed Access Points
1
View the listed access points.
● View the listed networks (access points)
as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using
WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
99).
2
Choose an access point.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
network (access point), and then press
the [ ] button.
10
Display CameraWindow.
● Windows: Access CameraWindow by
clicking [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera].
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically
displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is
established between the camera and
computer.
11
Import images.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed
after image import is complete.
● When viewing imported images on a
computer, always use software that
supports the images shot on the camera
(software normally installed on the
computer or general-use software).
102
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Previous Access Points
You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by
following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
99).
● To connect to a device via an access point, conrm that the target
device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the
procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
99).
● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen
displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow
the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (
=
99)
from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
101) from step 2.
3
Enter the access point password.
● Press the [ ] button to access the
keyboard, and then enter the password
(
=
28).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Next], and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose [Auto].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Auto], and then press the [ ] button.
● To save images to a connected computer,
follow the procedure from step 8 in
“Using WPS-Compatible Access Points”
(
=
99).
● To determine the access point password, check on the access
point itself or refer to the user manual.
● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are
detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the
list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point
settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an
SSID, security settings, and a password.
● When you use an access point that you have already connected
to for connecting to another device, [
*
] is displayed for the
password in step 3. To use the same password, press the [
][ ]
buttons to choose [Next], and then press the [
] button.
103
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Once the login screen is displayed,
enter your user name and password
to log in. If you do not have a CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow
the instructions to complete member
registration (free of charge).
2
Choose the type of camera.
● On this camera model, [ ] is displayed
in the Wi-Fi menu.
● Once you choose [
], a page is
displayed for entering the authentication
code. On this page in step 7, you will
enter the authentication code displayed
on the camera after steps 3 – 6.
3
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● After [Device Nickname] is displayed,
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Sending Images to a Registered
Web Service
Registering Web Services
Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that
you want to use.
● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is
required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and other Web services.
● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser
(Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and
version information.
● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon.
com/cig/).
● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check
the websites for each Web service you want to register.
● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable.
Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera.
1
Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
and access the camera link settings
page.
● From a computer or smartphone, access
http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
104
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
8
Check the conrmation number and
complete the setup process.
● On screen 2 of step 6, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [OK], and then press
the [ ] button. The conrmation number
is displayed.
● Make sure the conrmation number on
the camera matches the number on the
smartphone or computer.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Complete the setup process on the
smartphone or computer.
● [
] (
=
112) and CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY are now added as
destinations, and the [ ] icon changes
to [ ].
● A message is displayed on the
smartphone or computer to indicate that
this process is nished. To add other
Web services, follow the procedure
in “Registering Other Web Services”
(
=
105) from step 2.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in
step 3 (
=
103).
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the menu. Press
the [
][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then
congure the setting.
4
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
5
Choose [Authenticate].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Authenticate], and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Establish a connection with an
access point.
● Connect to the access point as described
in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible
Access Points” (
=
99) or in steps 2 – 4
in “Connecting to Listed Access Points”
(
=
101).
● Once the camera is connected to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point,
an authentication code is displayed.
● Keep this screen displayed until step 7 is
complete.
7
Enter the authentication code.
● On the smartphone or computer, enter
the authentication code displayed on the
camera and go to the next step.
● A six-digit conrmation number is
displayed.
105
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Uploading Images to Web Services
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Choose the destination.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
the icon of the Web service to connect to,
and then press the [ ] button.
● If multiple recipients or sharing options
are used with a Web service, choose the
desired item on the [Select Recipient]
screen by pressing the [
][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● When uploading to YouTube, read the
terms of service, choose [I Agree], and
press the [
] button.
Registering Other Web Services
You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the
camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the
camera rst (
=
103).
1
Access the Web service settings
screen.
● Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY” (
=
103) to log in
to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then
access the Web service settings screen.
2
Congure the Web service you want
to use.
● Follow the instructions displayed on the
smartphone or computer to set up the
Web service.
3
Choose [ ].
● In Playback mode, press the [ ] button
to access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
● The Web service settings are now
updated.
● If any congured settings change, follow these steps again to
update the camera settings.
106
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Printing Images Wirelessly from a
Connected Printer
Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows.
These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can
also use an existing access point (
=
96).
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
94).
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● The camera’s SSID is displayed.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed.
Press the [
] button to return to the
playback screen.
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and
add comments before sending (
=
109).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 3.
● We recommend using the dedicated application Canon Online
Photo Album when viewing images sent to CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY on a smartphone. Search for the Canon Online Photo
Album in the App Store for iPhone and iPad, or in Google Play for
Android smartphones, and download and install the app.
107
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in
the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another
Access Point” (
=
96).
4
Connect the printer to the network.
● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu,
choose the SSID (network name)
displayed on the camera to establish a
connection.
5
Choose the printer.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
printer name, and then press the [ ]
button.
6
Choose an image to print.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● For detailed printing instructions, see
“Printing Images” (
=
133).
● To end the connection, press the [
]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons on the
conrmation screen to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
108
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
4
Send an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Select and send], and then press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Select], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
an image to send, press the [ ] button to
mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
● Image transfer will begin. The screen
darkens during image transfer.
● [Transfer completed] is displayed after
the image is sent, and the image transfer
screen is displayed again.
● To end the connection, press the
[
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
on the conrmation screen to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
Sending Images to Another Camera
Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as
follows.
● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be
connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera
that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards.
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu.
● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in
step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using
the Wi-Fi Menu” (
=
94).
2
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose [Add a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera
too.
● Camera connection information will be
added when [Start connection on target
camera] is displayed on both camera
screens.
109
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Image Sending Options
You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image
recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also
enable you to annotate the images you send.
Sending Multiple Images
You can also select a range of images to send, or send all images tagged
as favorites together, from the image sending screen.
1
Choose [Select and send].
● On the image transfer screen, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and
send], and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
selection method.
Select a range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
109), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera.
● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent
destinations will be listed rst when you access the Wi-Fi menu.
You can easily connect again by pressing the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the device and then pressing the [
] button. To add a
new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons, and then congure the setting.
● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU
(
=
27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off].
● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image
size before sending (
=
109).
● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on
the screen in step 4.
110
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● You cannot choose [Favorites] in step 1 if no images are tagged
as favorites.
Notes on Sending Images
● Keep your ngers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area
(
=
4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image
transfers.
● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take
a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera
battery level.
● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you
can send.
● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image
quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the
smartphone user manual.
● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following
icons.
[
] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak
● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending
images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
78) to specify images.
● When also sending movies, choose [Incl.
Movies] by pressing the [
][ ][ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button.
[ ] is displayed.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
[OK], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
Sending Images Tagged as Favorites
You can send all images tagged as favorites (
=
83) together.
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple
Images” (
=
109), choose [Favorites]
and press the [ ] button.
● An image selection screen showing only
images tagged as favorites is displayed.
You can also not send the images if you
press the [
] button to remove [ ] after
selecting images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Send the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Send], and then press the [ ] button.
111
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Adding Comments
Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send
to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of
characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the
Web service.
1
Access the screen for adding
comments.
● On the image transfer screen, choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Add a comment (=
28).
3
Send the image.
● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent.
● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The
same comment is added to all images sent together.
Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image
Size)
On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose
the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons,
and then press the [ ] button.
● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option.
● Choosing [
] will resize images that are larger than the selected size
before sending.
● Movies cannot be resized.
● Image size can also be congured in MENU (
=
27) > [ ] tab
> [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending].
112
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
2
Choose the type of images to send
(only when sending movies with
images).
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [Stills/Movies].
3
Assign [ ] to the [ ] button (only
when sending images by pressing
the [ ] button).
● Clear the [ ] button setting if a
smartphone is already assigned to the
button (
=
93).
● Access the mobile connection screen
as described in step 2 in “Sending to
a Smartphone Assigned to the Button”
(
=
93), press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [ ], and then press the [ ]
button.
Preparing the Computer
Install and congure the software on the destination computer.
1
Install the software.
● Install the software on a computer
connected to the Internet (
=
97).
2
Register the camera.
● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ ],
and then click [Add new camera].
● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [
], and
then click [Add new camera].
Sending Images Automatically
(Image Sync)
Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can
be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services.
Initial Preparations
Preparing the Camera
Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button,
so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on
the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY.
1
Add [ ] as a destination.
● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in
“Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY”
(
=
103).
● If you are also uploading images to a
Web service, log in to the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY (
=
103), choose your
camera model, and then display the Web
service conguration screen and choose
the Web service you want to upload
images to from the Image Sync settings.
See the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help
for more details.
113
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery
pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
126).
● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different
method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY will be sent to the computer.
● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same
network as the camera, because images are sent via the access
point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images
stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so
the computer must be connected to the Internet.
Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your
Smartphone
Installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) on your
smartphone allows you to view and download images sent by Image
Sync and temporarily saved on CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on your
smartphone.
The following setup is required.
● You must have completed conguration for “Preparing the Computer”
(
=
112).
● Search for the Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store for iPhone
and iPad, or in Google Play for Android smartphones, and download
and install the app.
● Log in to the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (
=
103), choose your
camera model, and then display the Web service conguration screen
and change the Image Sync settings so that you can browse or
download from your smartphone. See the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY
Help for more details.
● A list of cameras linked to CANON
iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose
the camera from which images are to be
sent.
● Once the camera is registered and the
computer is ready to receive images, the
icon changes to [
].
Sending Images
Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer.
If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images
will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server.
Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer
and save the images.
1
Send images.
● If you have already assigned [ ] to the
[ ] button, press the [ ] button.
● If you have not assigned the button this
way, choose [
] as described in steps
1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web
Services” (
=
105).
● Images labeled with a [
] icon have been
sent.
2
Save the images to the computer.
● Images are automatically saved to the
computer when you turn it on.
● Images are automatically sent to Web
services from the CANON iMAGE
GATEWAY server, even if the computer
is off.
114
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Using a Smartphone to View Camera
Images and Control the Camera
You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera
Connect.
● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone
● Geotag images on the camera (
=
114)
● Shoot remotely (
=
115)
● Privacy settings must be congured in advance to allow image
viewing on the smartphone (
=
93,
=
94,
=
116).
Geotagging Images on the Camera
GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera
Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are
tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation.
● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home
time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and
Time” (
=
19). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (
=
119)
to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones.
● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data
in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing
these images with others, as when posting images online where
many others can view them.
● Images deleted from CANON iMAGE GATEWAY can no longer
be viewed after a certain time.
● You cannot view images sent before you changed the Image
Sync settings so that you can browse or download from your
smartphone.
● For details on using the Canon Online Photo Album, refer to the
Canon Online Photo Album Help.
115
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
● The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However,
some FUNC. and MENU settings you have congured in advance
may be changed automatically.
● Movie shooting is not available.
● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the
connection environment will not affect recorded images.
● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the
focus.
● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the
smartphone to browse and import images from the camera.
Shooting Remotely
As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to
shoot remotely.
1
Secure the camera.
● Once remote shooting begins, the
camera lens will come out. Lens motion
from zooming may also move the camera
out of position. Keep the camera still by
mounting it on a tripod or taking other
measures.
2
Connect the camera and
smartphone (=
93, =
94).
● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes].
3
Choose remote shooting.
● In Camera Connect on the smartphone,
choose remote shooting.
● The camera lens will come out. Do not
press near the lens, and make sure no
objects will obstruct it.
● Once the camera is ready for remote
shooting, a live image from the camera
will be displayed on the smartphone.
● At this time, a message is displayed on
the camera, and all operations except
pressing the power button are disabled.
4
Shoot.
● Use the smartphone to shoot.
116
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Congurable Items
Connection
Web
Services
[Change Device Nickname]
(
=
116)
O O O O
–
[View Settings] (
=
93)
–
O
– – –
[Erase Connection Info] (
=
116)
O O O O
–
O
: Congurable
–
: Not congurable
Changing a Device Nickname
You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on
the camera.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
116), choose [Change
Device Nickname] and press the [ ]
button.
● Select the input eld and press the [
]
button. Use the keyboard displayed to
enter a new nickname (
=
28).
Erasing Connection Information
Erase connection information (information about devices that you have
connected to) as follows.
● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection
Information” (
=
116), choose [Erase
Connection Info] and press the [ ]
button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
● The connection information will be
erased.
Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings
Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows.
Editing Connection Information
1
Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose
a device to edit.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to access
the device selection screen, press the
[ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the icon
of a device to edit, and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Choose [Edit a Device].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Edit
a Device], and then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the device to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
device to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
4
Choose the item to edit.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
the item to edit, and then press the [ ]
button.
● The items you can change depend on the
device or service.
117
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Wi-Fi Functions
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default
Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the
camera to another person, or dispose of it.
Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be
sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
2
Choose [Reset Settings].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Reset Settings], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Restore the default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset.
● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose
[Reset All] on the [
] tab (
=
124).
Changing the Camera Nickname
You can change the camera nickname displayed on the connected device.
1
Choose [Wi-Fi Settings].
● Press the [ ] button and choose
[Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (
=
27).
2
Choose [Change Device Nickname].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Change Device Nickname], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the device nickname.
● Press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard
displayed to enter a new nickname
(
=
28).
● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with
a symbol or space. Press the [
] button and enter a different
nickname.
● You can change the nickname when using the Wi-Fi function for
the rst time by selecting the input eld on the displayed [Device
Nickname] screen, pressing the [
] button, and using the
keyboard displayed.
118
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
Basic camera functions are congured on the [ ] tab of the MENU
(
=
27). Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button
as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
69) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button.
Adjust volume with the [
][ ] buttons, as needed.
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press the [
]
button.
● Choose an item, and then press the
[
][ ] buttons to adjust the volume.
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience
119
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when
you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to
that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the
Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your
home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
19).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[ World], and then press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose the
destination.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [
] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by
pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [
] button.
2
Switch to the destination time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ World], and then press the [ ]
button.
● [
] is now shown on the shooting screen
(
=
146).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
19) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (
=
26) or
MENU (
=
27) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose
[Off].
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the
[
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons
to adjust the setting.
120
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto
Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (
=
25).
● Choose [Power Saving], and then press
the [
] button.
● After choosing an item, press the [
][ ]
buttons to adjust it as needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
120) to [On].
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press
the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
24). To have the lens retracted
immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to
[0 sec.].
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then
choose [0 sec.].
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode.
When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce
battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On].
● [ ] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
146).
● The screen darkens when the camera
is not used for approximately two
seconds; approximately ten seconds
after darkening, the screen turns off.
The camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the
lens is still out, press the shutter button
halfway.
121
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device,
you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy
images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back
them up.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format], and then press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Cancel], press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button.
● When formatting is nished, [Memory
card formatting complete] is displayed.
Press the [
] button.
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at
least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when
in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness]
setting on the [
] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press
and hold the [
] button again for at least one second or restart
the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally
shown when you turn the camera on.
● Choose [Start-up Image], and then
choose [Off].
122
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999)
and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change
how the camera assigns le numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and then
choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the
9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch
memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted,
=
121) memory card.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is
displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing
is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly
stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-
level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take
other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
121), press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Low Level
Format], and then press the [ ][ ]
buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is
displayed.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
121) to continue with the
formatting process.
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
121), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
123
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can be
viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in this guide, on
the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose [Certication Logo Display], and
then press the [
] button.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose
a language, and then press the [ ]
button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the
camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose
[Daily].
● Images will now be saved in folders
created on the shooting date.
Metric / Non-Metric Display
Change the unit of measurement shown in GPS elevation information
(
=
114), zoom bar (
=
30) and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as
needed.
● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in].
124
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Setting Menu
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
128)
● [Wi-Fi Settings] (
=
89)
● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (
=
93)
Restoring Default Camera Settings
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera
settings.
1
Access the [Reset All] screen.
● Choose [Reset All], and then press the
[ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
119), [Time Zone] (
=
119),
[Language
] (
=
123), and [Video System] (
=
128)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
60)
- Shooting Mode
- Wi-Fi settings (
=
89)
125
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
System Map
Wrist strap
Battery Pack
NB-6LH*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Cards Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC40
Included Accessories
Power
Cables
HDMI Cable
(camera end: D-type)*
3
AV Cable AVC-DC400
Flash Units
PictBridge
Compatible Printers
High-Power
Flash
HF-DC2
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU).
*3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.).
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and
other compatible accessories sold separately
126
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be
available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-6LH
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
● Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported.
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
● For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended when
using the camera over extended periods,
or when connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be used to
charge the battery pack in the camera.
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used
with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents
such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon
accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please
note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the
malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request
such repairs on a chargeable basis.
127
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Printers
Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible
printers
● Even without using a computer, you can
print images by connecting the camera
directly to a printer.
For details, visit your nearest Canon
retailer.
● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Flash Units
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
● External ash for illuminating subjects
that are out of range of the built-in ash.
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
● For connecting the camera to a computer
or printer.
AV Cable AVC-DC400
● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy
playback on the larger TV screen.
128
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
external input.
● Switch the TV input to the external input
you connected the cable to in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● When nished, turn off the camera and
TV before disconnecting the cable.
● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is
connected to an HDTV.
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
147).
Playback on a High-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV
with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with a
Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image quality of
[ ] or [ ] can be viewed in high denition.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into
the HDMI input as shown.
129
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot
while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot,
follow the same steps as when using the camera screen.
However, AF-Point Zoom (
=
43) is not available.
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately)
eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Insert the coupler.
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (
=
18) to
open the cover.
● Holding the coupler with the terminals (1)
facing as shown, insert the coupler just
as you would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and
Memory Card” (
=
18)).
● Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card” (
=
18) to
close the cover.
3
Connect the adapter to the coupler.
● Open the cover and insert the adapter
plug fully into the coupler.
(1)
Playback on a Standard-Denition TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV with the AV Cable AVC-DC400 (sold
separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV
as you control the camera.
1
Make sure the camera and TV are
off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into
the video inputs as shown.
● On the camera, open the terminal cover
and insert the cable plug fully into the
camera terminal.
3
Display images.
● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a
High-Denition TV” (
=
128) to display
images.
● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
] button and choose
[Video System] on the [
] tab.
130
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Using the Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it on
the computer you are using, you can do the following things.
● CameraWindow
- Save images to a computer
● Image Transfer Utility
- Congure and receive images with Image Sync (
=
112)
● Map Utility
- Display GPS information recorded in images on a map
● When viewing or editing images on a computer, always use
software that supports the images shot on the camera (software
normally installed on the computer or general-use software).
4
Connect the power cord.
● Insert one end of the power cord into the
compact power adapter, and then plug
the other end into a power outlet.
● Turn the camera on and use it as desired.
● When nished, turn the camera off and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
131
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
● Follow the steps below to uninstall (delete) the software.
- In Windows, click in the following order: [Start] menu
>
[All
Programs]
>
[Canon Utilities], and then choose the software you
want to uninstall.
- In Mac OS, click on [Applications] folder
,
choose the [Canon
Utilities] folder, drag the folder of the software you want to
uninstall to the trash, and then empty the trash.
Computer Connections via a Cable
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including support in
new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
● Windows 8/8.1
● Windows 7 SP1
● Mac OS X 10.9
● Mac OS X 10.8
When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system
requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (
=
97).
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration.
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to the
Internet, access http://www.canon.com/
icpd/.
● Access the site for your country or region.
● Download the software.
2
Install the les.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the
installation process. Installation may
take some time, depending on computer
performance and the Internet connection.
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen
after installation.
132
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon
Camera] and then click [OK].
● Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Import Images from Camera], and
then click [Import Untransferred Images].
● Images are now saved to the Pictures
folder on the computer, in separate
folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
] button to
turn the camera off, and unplug the cable.
● When viewing imported images on a
computer, always use software that
supports the images shot on the camera
(software normally installed on the
computer or general-use software).
Saving Images to a Computer
Connecting the camera to a computer with a commercial USB cable (the
camera terminal is Mini-B) enables you to import your shots.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
● With the camera turned off, open the
cover (1). With the smaller plug of the
USB cable in the orientation shown,
insert the plug fully into the camera
terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable
in the computer’s USB port. For details
about USB connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed
when a connection is established
between the camera and computer.
● Windows: Follow the steps introduced
below.
● In the screen that is displayed, click the
change program link of [
].
(1)
(2)
133
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer.
On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare
orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print
images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the
sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by
printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer with a
commercial USB cable (the camera terminal is Mini-B) enables you to
print your shots.
1
Make sure the camera and printer
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding the
smaller cable plug in the orientation
shown, insert the plug fully into the
camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to the
printer. For other connection details, refer
to the printer manual.
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
134
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
133) to access this screen.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No. Prints images with the le number added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and le
number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of shooting to
print under optimal settings.
Red-
Eye 1
Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(
=
135).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and other
details (
=
135).
3
Turn the printer on.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera
on.
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image.
6
Access the printing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and
press the [ ] button again.
7
Print the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[Print], and then press the [ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the above
procedures starting from step 5 after
printing is nished.
● When you are nished printing, turn the
camera and printer off and disconnect
the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printers” (
=
127).
135
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
134) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [
] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option, and then press the [ ] button.
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
option.
● When choosing [N-up], press the [
][ ]
buttons to specify the number of images
per sheet.
● Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area
instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● After following step 1 in “Conguring Print
Settings” (
=
134) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and press the
[ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now displayed,
indicating the image area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, move the zoom
lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, press the [
] button.
● Press the [
] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (
=
133)
to print.
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
● Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
136
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
133) to choose a movie. This screen
is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the printing method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a
single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number,
le number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting
[Caption] to [On].
● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK],
and then press the [
] button again.
● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier
models.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of
L and an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints.
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing
Paper Size and Layout before Printing”
(
=
135), choose [ID Photo] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose the long and short side
length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
item. Choose the length by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ]
button.
3
Choose the printing area.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before
Printing” (
=
135) to choose the printing
area.
4
Print the image.
137
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date
twice.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
19).
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab,
and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number of
copies.
● If you specify index printing for the
image, it is labeled with a [
] icon. To
cancel index printing for the image, press
the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
138) and ordering prints from a photo development
service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a
memory card and congure relevant settings, such as the number of
copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will
conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number, and
other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print
list.
● Press the [
] button, and then
choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab.
Choose and congure items as desired
(
=
27).
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images are
printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear
DPOF data
On
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
Off
–
138
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
137), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
● When images have been added to the
print list (
=
137 –
=
138), this screen
is displayed after you connect the camera
to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now],
and then simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily
stop will be resumed from the next image.
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the
number of prints (up to 99).
● To set up printing for other images and
specify the number of prints, repeat steps
2 – 3.
● Printing quantity cannot be specied for
index prints. You can only choose which
images to print, by following step 2.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
137), choose
[Select Range] and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range”
(
=
78) to specify images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Order], and then press the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing
for Individual Images” (
=
137), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
139
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Accessories
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Appendix
Index
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the photobook,
press the [
] button again. [ ] is no
longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify other
images.
● When nished, press the [
] button
to return to the menu screen.
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
139), choose
[Select All Images] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
139), choose
[Clear All Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [OK],
and then press the [ ] button.
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images
on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer,
where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when
ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own
printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose how you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
139), choose
[Select] and press the [ ] button.
140
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the following.
If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer
Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
17).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
18).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
18).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery
pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals
do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals
with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon
after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the
cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
18).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if
battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the camera, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
128).
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
141
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the
shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter
button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
66).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
58).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
59,
=
86).
● Use spot metering (
=
58).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
30).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
58).
● Use spot metering (
=
58).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
33).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
158).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
59).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
158).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
30).
White spots appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne particles.
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
59).
● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (
=
49).
Subjects are affected by red-eye (
=
41).
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
45). Note that while the red-eye reduction lamp
(
=
4) is lit (for about one second), it is not possible to shoot, because the
lamp is counteracting red-eye. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye
reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at
closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
86).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
69), press the shutter button halfway (
=
25).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
26).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are
recorded in movies.
- The screen may icker and horizontal banding may appear under uorescent
or LED lighting.
No date stamp is added to images.
● Congure the [Date Stamp ] setting (
=
39). Note that date stamps are not
added to images automatically, merely because you have congured the [Date/
Time] setting (
=
19).
● Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (
=
151) in which
[Date Stamp
] cannot be congured (
=
39).
[ ] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting
is not possible (
=
33).
[ ] is displayed on the screen when the shutter button is pressed halfway
(
=
33).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
44).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
66).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
59).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure
the camera (
=
44).
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the
way down to shoot (
=
25).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
158).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
45).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
142
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
118) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
118) or the sound
in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] mode (
=
51) because audio is not
recorded in this mode.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
24).
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the
transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button
down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next
screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button.
Wi-Fi
Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [
] button.
● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and
try again.
● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during detailed
information display, magnied display, or index display. Switch to single-image
display and a viewing mode other than detailed information display. Similarly, the
Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or ltered image display
according to specied conditions. Cancel group or ltered image playback.
● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer,
computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable.
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is
slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
122).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in
Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (
=
148 –
=
151).
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports
high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the
length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time
(
=
121,
=
157).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record to
the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
122).
- Lower the image quality (
=
42).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
157).
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] mode (
=
51).
Subjects look distorted.
● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a
malfunction.
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename
les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the
camera (
=
122).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards
that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may
skip if computer performance is inadequate.
143
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted.
● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce
sending time (
=
111).
● Movies may take a long time to send.
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [
] is
displayed.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the
camera or giving it to someone else.
● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (
=
117).
Cannot add a device/destination.
● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase
unneeded connection information from the camera rst, and then add new
devices/destinations (
=
116).
● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (
=
103).
● To add a smartphone, rst install the dedicated application Camera Connect on
your smartphone (
=
90).
● To add a computer, rst install the software CameraWindow on your computer.
Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (
=
97,
=
99).
● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as
microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4
GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
Cannot connect to the access point.
● Conrm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the
camera (
=
156). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to
specify a supported channel manually.
Cannot send images.
● The destination device has insufcient storage space. Increase the storage space
on the destination device and resend the images.
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to
the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position.
● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you
move or rename image les or folders on the computer that received images sent
using Image Sync via an access point (
=
112). Before moving or renaming
these image les or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already
been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services.
Cannot resize images for sending.
● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their
original size.
● Movies cannot be resized.
144
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shufe/Cannot
rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Unselectable image
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or
already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that
starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Magnify (
=
75)*, Smart Shufe (
=
76)*, Rotate (
=
81)*, Favorites
(
=
83), Edit (
=
84)*, Print List (
=
137)* and Photobook Set-up(
=
139)*
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
78,
=
81,
=
138), you
attempted to choose an initial image that was after the nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
137) or Photobook Set-up
(
=
139). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
137) or Photobook Set-up (
=
139) settings could not be saved
correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
77), Erase
(
=
79), Favorites (
=
83), Print List (
=
137), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
139).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the
highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been
reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders
has been reached. On the [
] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset]
(
=
122), or format the memory card (
=
121).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is
used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not
have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this
case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support
Help Desk.
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
Shooting or Playback
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory
card facing the correct way (
=
18).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch
the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (
=
18).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a
memory card facing the correct way (
=
18).
Memory card error (
=
122)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
2) and have inserted it facing the correct way
(
=
18), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
30,
=
47,
=
57) or edit images (
=
84). Either erase unneeded images (
=
79) or
insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
18).
Charge the battery (
=
17)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
77)
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large/Cannot play back
(MOV)
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a
computer, or images shot with another camera.
145
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed
● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed.
● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth
devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band.
● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as
the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices.
● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors.
Sending failed
Memory card error
● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted
memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
Receiving failed
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to
receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a
memory card with sufcient space.
Receiving failed
Memory card locked
● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images
is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked
position.
Receiving failed
Naming error!
● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999)
have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received.
Insufcient space on server
● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create
space.
● Save the images sent via Image Sync (
=
112) to your computer.
Check network settings
● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current
network settings.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
133) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or
images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is
connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
135). If this error message is displayed when
the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera
again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink
absorber replacement.
Wi-Fi
Connection failed
● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (
=
99).
● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the
connection.
● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection.
Cannot determine access point
● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try
reconnecting again.
No access points found
● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on.
● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the
correct SSID.
Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings
● Check the access point security settings (
=
99).
IP address conict
● Reset the IP address so that it does not conict with another.
146
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
(20) Red-eye correction (
=
41)
(21) Date stamp (
=
39)
(22) Shutter speed
(23) Spot frame (
=
58)
(24) Aperture value
(25) Exposure compensation level
(
=
58)
(26) i-Contrast (
=
59)
(27) ISO speed (
=
59)
(28) Zoom bar (
=
30)
(29) IS mode icon (
=
35)
(30) Blink detection (
=
43)
(31) Auto zoom (
=
36)
(32) Time zone (
=
119)
(33) Image stabilization (
=
44)
* In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available.
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack
soon.
[Charge the battery] Depleted. Charge the battery immediately.
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9) (10)(11)(12)(13)(14)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)(23) (24)(25) (26)(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
(32) (33)
(15)
(31)
(1) Battery level (
=
146)
(2) White balance (
=
60)
(3) My Colors (
=
60)
(4) Drive mode (
=
40)
(5) Eco mode (
=
120)
(6) Grid lines (
=
42)
(7) Camera shake warning (
=
33)
(8) Metering method (
=
58)
(9) Still image compression (
=
67),
Recording pixel setting (
=
41)
(10) Recordable shots (
=
157)*
(11) Self-timer (
=
37)
(12) Movie quality (
=
42)
(13) Remaining time (
=
157)
(14) Zoom magnification (
=
36),
Digital tele-converter (
=
63)
(15) Focus range (
=
62)
(16) Shooting mode (
=
148),
Scene icon (
=
34)
(17) AF Frame (
=
63)
(18) Hybrid Auto mode (
=
32)
(19) Flash mode (
=
66)
147
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
(24) Image editing (
=
84)
(25) White balance (
=
60)
(26) Red-eye correction (
=
41,
=
86)
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
128).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel,
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
69).
Exit
Playback
Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback
speed. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward*
or Previous Clip (
=
88) (To continue skipping
backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Skip Forward* or Next Clip (
=
88) (To continue skipping
forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.)
Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected,
=
88)
Edit (
=
87)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible
printer (
=
133).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the
previous or next clip) by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(22)
(7)
(8) (9) (10)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(6)
(23)
(24) (25)(26)
(21)
(12)(13) (14)(11)
(1) Movies (
=
30,
=
69), High-
speed burst (
=
56)
(2) My Colors (
=
60,
=
85)
(3) Histogram (
=
71)
(4) Group playback (
=
74)
(5) Compression (image quality)
(
=
67) / Recording pixel setting
(
=
41), MP4 (movies)
(6) Protection (
=
77)
(7) Favorites (
=
83)
(8) Exposure compensation level
(
=
58)
(9) ISO speed (
=
59), Playback
speed (
=
52)
(10) Shooting mode (
=
148)
(11) Metering method (
=
58)
(12) Battery level (
=
146)
(13) Image Sync (
=
112)
(14) Folder number - File number
(
=
122)
(15) Current image no. / Total no. of
images
(16) Shutter speed (still images), Image
quality / Frame rate (movies)
(
=
42)
(17) Aperture value
(18) Flash (
=
66)
(19) i-Contrast (
=
59,
=
86)
(20) Focus range (
=
62)
(21) File size
(22) Still images: Recording pixel
setting (
=
157)
Movies: Playback time (
=
157)
(23) Shooting date/time (
=
19)
148
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Functions and Menu Tables
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Shooting Mode
Function
Exposure Compensation (
=
58)
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O
–
Flash (
=
66)
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
– –
– – –
O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
*
1
–
*
1
O
– – – – –
*
1
– – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Focus Range (
=
62)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O O
– – –
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
Tracking AF Select Subject (
=
64)
– – –
O O
– – –
O
–
O
– – –
O O O O
–
O
Switch Display of Shot Information (
=
26)
O
–
O O O
– – –
O O O
– – – –
O O O O O
*1 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases.
149
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
FUNC. Menu
Shooting Mode
Function
Metering Method (
=
58)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
My Colors (
=
60)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
1
*
1
*
2
– – –
O
–
O O O
– – – – – – – – – – –
O
White Balance (
=
60)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
– – –
O
–
O O O O
–
O
– – – – – – – –
O
ISO Speed (
=
59)
AUTO
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200
– – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
Self-Timer (
=
37)
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
Self-Timer Settings (
=
38)
Delay*
3
O O O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
Shots*
4
– –
O O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
Drive Mode (
=
40)
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O
– – –
O
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
*1 White balance is not available.
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin
tone.
*3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots.
*4 One shot (cannot be modied) in modes without selection of the number of shots.
150
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Shooting Mode
Function
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
40)
– –
O O O O O O
– – – –
*
1
–
O O O O O O
Recording Pixels (
=
41)
O O O O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O
– – – – – – – –
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – –
– –
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O
Compression (
=
67)
– – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Movie Quality (
=
42)
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
O O O O O O O O O O O O
*
2
O O O O O O O
Auto Zoom (
=
36)
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
*1 Only [ ] and [ ] are available.
*2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (
=
52).
151
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Shooting Tab
Shooting Mode
Function
AF Frame (
=
63)
Face AiAF
O O O O O O O O O O O
– –
O O O O O
–
O
Tracking AF
– – –
O O
– – –
O
–
O
– – –
O O O O
–
O
Center
– – –
O O
– – –
O
–
O O
–
O O O O O O O
AF Frame Size (
=
63)
*
1
Standard
– – –
O O
– – –
O
–
O O
–
O O O O O
–
O
Small
– – –
O O
– – –
O
–
O
– –
O O O O O
–
O
Digital Zoom (
=
36)
Standard
O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
1.6x/2.0x
– – –
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
AF-Point Zoom (
=
43)
On
–
O O O O O O O O
–
O
– – –
O O O O
–
O
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Servo AF (
=
65)
On
– – –
O O
– – – – –
O
– – –
O O O O
– –
Off
O O
*
2
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Continuous AF (
=
66)
On
O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
–
O
Off
– – –
O O
– – – –
O O O O O O O O O O O
*1 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].
*2 [On] when subject movement is detected in [
] mode.
152
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Shooting Mode
Function
AF-assist Beam (
=
45)
On
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O
Off
O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Flash Settings (
=
41,
=
45)
Red-Eye Corr.
On
O
–
O O O O O O
–
O O
– – – – – –
O
–
O
Off
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
O
Red-Eye Lamp On/Off
O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O
–
O
i-Contrast (
=
59)
Auto
O
–
O O
– – – –
O
–
O
– – – – – – – – –
Off
–
O
–
O O O O O
–
O
–
O O O O O O O O O
Review image after shooting (
=
46)
Display Time
Off/Quick
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / hold
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Display Info
Not displayed
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Detailed
O
–
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Blink Detection (
=
43)
On
O
–
O O O O O O
– –
O
– – – –
O O O
– –
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Grid Lines (
=
42)
On/Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
IS Settings (
=
44)
Image Stabilization
Off
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O
On
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Shoot Only
– – –
O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O
Dynamic IS
1
O O O O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O
2
O O O O O O O O O
–
O O O O O O O O O O
153
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Shooting Mode
Function
Date Stamp (
=
39)
Off
O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Date/Date + Time
O
–
O O O O O O
– – – – – – – – –
O O O
Digest Type (
=
32)
Include Stills/No Stills
O
– – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
154
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Playback Tab
Item Reference Page
List/Play Digest Movies
=
72
Slideshow
=
75
Erase
=
79
Protect
=
77
Rotate
=
81
Favorites
=
83
Photobook Set-up
=
139
i-Contrast
=
86
Red-Eye Correction
=
86
Cropping
=
84
Resize
=
84
My Colors
=
85
Transition
=
69
Scroll Display
=
69
Group Images
=
74
Auto Rotate
=
82
Resume
=
69
Set Up Tab
Item Reference Page
Mute
=
118
Volume
=
118
Hints & Tips
=
119
Date/Time
=
19
Time Zone
=
119
Lens Retraction
=
120
Eco Mode
=
120
Power Saving
=
25,
=
120
LCD Brightness
=
121
Start-up Image
=
121
Format
=
121,
=
122
File Numbering
=
122
Create Folder
=
123
Units
=
123
Video System
=
128
Wi-Fi Settings
=
89
Mobile Device Connect Button
=
93
Certication Logo Display
=
123
Language
=
20
Reset All
=
124
155
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or
subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that
generate strong electromagnetic elds. This may cause malfunction or
erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with
a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply
force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera
or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difcult,
contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden
temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to
warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic
bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it
from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately.
Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove
the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has
evaporated before resuming use.
● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To
maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for
some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until
it runs out of power before storing the battery pack.
Print Tab
Item Reference Page
Print
–
Select Images & Qty.
=
137
Select Range
=
138
Select All Images
=
138
Clear All Selections
=
138
Print Settings
=
137
Playback Mode FUNC. Menu
Item Reference Page
Rotate
=
81
Protect
=
77
Favorites
=
83
Erase
=
79
Print
=
133
Group Playback
=
74
Play Movie
=
69
Play Linked Digest Movie
=
72
Smart Shufe
=
76
Image Search
=
73
Slideshow
=
75
156
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Wi-Fi
Standards
IEEE 802.11b/g/n*
* 2.4 GHz band only
Transmission
Methods
OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n)
DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b)
Communication
Modes
Infrastructure mode*
1
, Ad hoc mode*
2
*1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup
*2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS
Supported
Channels
1-11 ch
Security
WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP),
WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP)
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm lm equivalent)
Digital Zoom [Standard]
25 ‒ 1800 mm
(Represents the combined focal length
of optical and digital zoom.)
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 40.0 ‒ 720 mm
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 50.0 ‒ 900 mm
Specications
Camera Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 20.2 million pixels
Lens Focal
Length
18x zoom: 4.5 (W) ‒ 81.0 (T) mm
(35mm lm equivalent: 25 (W) – 450 (T) mm)
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective pixels: approx. 922,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version
1.1) compliant
Data Type
Still images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG)
Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio:
MPEG-4 AAC-LC (Monaural))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
HDMI output
Analog audio output (Monaural)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-6LH
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
105.3 x 61.0 x 26.7 mm (4.15 x 2.40 x 1.05 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 191 g (approx. 6.74 oz.; including the
battery pack/batteries and memory card)
Approx. 167 g (approx. 5.89 oz.; camera body only)
157
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Number of Shots per Memory Card
Number of
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory Card
(Approx. shots)
16 GB
(Large)
20M/5184 x 3888
1680
2729
(Medium 1)
10M/3648 x 2736
3217
5061
(Medium 2)
3M/2048 x 1536
9344
16755
(Small)
0.3M/640 x 480
53992
80988
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
16 GB
1 hr. 08 min. 34 sec.
3 hr. 58 min. 01 sec.
8 hr. 25 min. 48 sec.
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions
and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera
settings.
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip le size reaches 4 GB,
or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59
seconds when shooting in [
] [ ], or approximately 1 hour when
shooting in [ ].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been
reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 10 or higher
memory cards are recommended.
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots Approx. 270 shots
Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 400 shots
Movie Recording Time*
1
Approx. 1 hr.
Movie Recording Time (Continuous
Shooting*
2
)
Approx. 1 hr. 30 min.
Playback Time*
3
Approx. 5 hr.
*1 Times are under the following shooting conditions.
- AUTO mode
- Image quality [
]
- Repeated shooting, stopping, zooming, turning power on/off
*2 Times are under the following shooting conditions.
- AUTO mode
- Image quality [
]
- No operations such as zooming
- Shooting immediately resumed after automatically stopping when the le size
reaches 4GB or the recording time reaches 29 min. 59 sec.
*3 Time for still images played back in a slideshow.
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement
guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA).
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording
time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
158
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Appendix
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Index
Battery Pack NB-6LH
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: DC 3.7 V
Nominal Capacity: 1060 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) –
0.05 A (240 V)
Rated Output: DC 4.2 V, 0.7 A
Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-
indicator system)
Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle ( )
50 cm – 3.5 m (1.6 – 11 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (
)
1.0 – 2.0 m (3.3 – 6.6 ft.)
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focus
Range
Maximum Wide Angle
( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
5 cm ‒ ∞
(2.0 in. ‒ innity)
1.0 m – ∞
(3.3 ft. – innity)
Other
modes
5 cm ‒ ∞
(2.0 in. ‒ innity)
1.0 m ‒ ∞
(3.3 ft. ‒ innity)
*
5 – 50 cm
(2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
* Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Shooting Mode Speed
Approx. 2.5 shots/sec.
Approx. 7.2 shots/sec.
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode,
automatically set
range
1 –1/2000 sec.
Aperture
f/number f/3.8 / f/11 (W), f/6.9 / f/20 (T)
* Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available.
159
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
A
AC adapter kit 126, 129
Accessories 126
AF frames 63
Aspect ratio 40
AUTO mode (shooting mode) 21, 30
AV cable 129
B
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time
battery)
Power saving 25
Battery charger 2, 126
Battery pack
Charging 17
Eco mode 120
Level 146
Power saving 25
Black and white images 61
Blink detection 43
C
Camera
Reset all 124
Camera access point mode 97
Camera Connect 90
CameraWindow 97, 130
CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 89, 103
Center (AF frame mode) 65
Clock 29
Color (white balance) 60
Compression ratio (image quality) 67
Connecting via an access point 99
Continuous shooting
High-speed burst (shooting
mode) 56
Creative Shot 47
Cropping 84, 135
Custom white balance 60
D
Date/time
Adding date stamps 39
Changing 19
Date/time battery 20
Settings 19
World clock 119
DC coupler 129
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter 63
Digital zoom 36
Display language 20
DPOF 137
E
Eco mode 120
Editing
Cropping 84
i-Contrast 86
My Colors 85
Red-eye correction 86
Resizing images 84
Editing or erasing connection
information 116
Erasing 79
Error messages 144
Exposure
Compensation 58
F
Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 63
Face self-timer (shooting mode) 54
Favorites 83
File numbering 122
Fireworks (shooting mode) 49
Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 51
Flash
On 67
Slow synchro 67
Focusing
AF frames 63
AF-point zoom 43
Servo AF 65
Focusing range
Macro 62
Focus lock 65
FUNC. menu
Basic operations 26
Table 149, 155
G
Grid lines 42
H
Handheld nightscene (shooting mode)
49
HDMI cable 128
High-speed burst (shooting mode) 56
Household power 129
Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 32
I
i-Contrast 59, 86
Image quality
→
Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Display period 46
Erasing 79
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting 77
Image stabilization 44
Image Sync 112
Indicator 29, 45
ISO speed 59
L
Long shutter (shooting mode) 55
Low light (shooting mode) 49
M
Macro (focus range) 62
Magnied display 75
Memory cards 2
Recording time 157
Menu
Basic operations 27
Table 148
Metering method 58
Miniature effect (shooting mode) 51
Mobile Device Connection 93
Monochrome (shooting mode) 53
Movies
Editing 87
Image quality (resolution/frame
rate) 42
Recording time 157
My Colors 60, 85
160
Before Use
Basic Guide
Index
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Traveling with the camera 119
Troubleshooting 140
TV display 128
V
Viewing 22
Image search 73
Index display 72
Magnied display 75
Single-image display 22
Slideshow 75
Smart Shufe 76
TV display 128
W
White balance (color) 60
Wi-Fi functions 89
Wi-Fi menu 94
Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 54
World clock 119
Z
Zoom 21, 31, 36
N
Neck strap
→
Strap
P
P (shooting mode) 57
Package contents 2
Photobook set-up 139
PictBridge 127, 133
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) 49
Poster effect (shooting mode) 50
Power 126
→
AC adapter
kit,
→
Battery charger,
→
Battery
pack
Power saving 25
Printing 133
Program AE 57
Protecting 77
R
Recording pixels (image size) 41
Red-eye correction 41, 86
Remote shooting 115
Reset all 124
Resizing images 84
Rotating 81
S
Saving images to a computer 97, 132
Screen
Display language 20
Icons 146, 147
Menu
→
FUNC. menu, Menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching 73
Self-timer 37
2-second self-timer 38
Customizing the self-timer 38
Face self-timer (shooting mode)
54
Wink self-timer (shooting mode)
54
Sending images 109
Sending images to a computer 97
Sending images to another camera
108
Sending images to a printer 106
Sending images to a smartphone 90
Sending images to Web services 105
Sepia tone images 61
Servo AF 65
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information 146
Slideshow 75
Smart Shufe 76
Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 53
Smile (shooting mode) 53
Snow (shooting mode) 49
Software
Installation 97
Saving images to a computer
97, 132
Sounds 118
Stereo AV cable 127, 128, 129
Strap 2, 16
Super vivid (shooting mode) 50
T
Terminal 128, 129, 133
Toy camera effect (shooting mode)
52
Tracking AF 64
161
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions
●
-
●
-
-
● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations,
export permission (or service transaction permission) from the
Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or
services (including this product) outside Japan.
● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls
under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported
to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo.
● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use.
The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be
erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio
waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make
notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that
Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss
of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content.
● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or
sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and
reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary.
● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or
theft of the product.
Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from
unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this
product due to loss or theft of the product.
● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide.
Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the
guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for
damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other
than as described in this guide.
●
Radio Wave Interference Precautions
● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit
radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far
away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the
same time as this product.
Security Precautions
Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions
more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required.
Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi.
● Only use networks you are authorized to use.
This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays
the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use
(unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to
connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized
access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and
do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks.
162
Before Use
Basic Guide
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto
Mode
Other Shooting Modes
P Mode
Playback Mode
Wi-Fi Functions
Setting Menu
Accessories
Appendix
Index
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Denition Multimedia Interface are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
● Wi-Fi
®
, Wi-Fi Alliance
®
, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc.
in the United States and in other countries.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard
and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or
decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for
a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider
licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant
video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4
standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the
actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any
loss arising from the use of this product.
If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may
occur.
● Transmission monitoring
Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions
and attempt to acquire the data you are sending.
● Unauthorized network access
Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to
the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information.
Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access
such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain
access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where
someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard
to cover their tracks when inltrating other systems).
To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly
secure your Wi-Fi network.
Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of
Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security
settings.
The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers
via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy
to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices
directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS
over IP enables PictBridge connections in network
environments, and the camera is also compatible with
this standard.
Documenttranscriptie
Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Camera User Guide Other Shooting Modes ENGLISH P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions” (= 13) section, before using the camera. ●● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly. ●● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future. Setting Menu ●● Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages. : Next page Accessories : Previous page : Page before you clicked a link Appendix ●● To jump to the beginning of a chapter, click the chapter title at right. © CANON INC. 2015 CDD-E638-010 Index 1 Before Use Compatible Memory Cards The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of capacity. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● SD memory cards* Initial Information Package Contents ●● SDHC memory cards* Camera Basics ●● SDXC memory cards* Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes * Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been verified to work with the camera. P Mode Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Camera Battery Pack NB-6LH* Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Accessories Appendix Index Wrist Strap * Do not peel off the adhesive covering from a battery pack. ●● Printed matter is also included. ●● A memory card is not included (= 2). 2 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable. ●● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings. Conventions in This Guide ●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons and switches on which they appear or which they resemble. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons. Numbers in brackets correspond to the numbered controls shown in “Part Names” (= 4). [ ] Up button (7) on back [ ] Left button (8) on back [ ] Right button (13) on back [ ] Down button (14) on back Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets. P Mode Playback Mode ●● : Important information you should know ●● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ●● : Notes and tips for expert camera use ●● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This is not a malfunction. In addition, this does not affect recorded images. ●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings. ●● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before using the camera. Before Use Wi-Fi Functions ●● = xx: Pages with related information. (in this example, “xx” represents a page number) Setting Menu ●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as the “memory card”. Accessories ●● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate how the function is used—whether for still images or movies. Appendix Index ●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm. This does not indicate damage. 3 Before Use Part Names (3)(4)(5)(6) (7) (8) Basic Guide (9) (10) (11) (1) (2) (3) (4) Advanced Guide (5) Camera Basics (2) (7) (8) (1) (12) (13) (14) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (11) (12) (6) Other Shooting Modes (9) (13) (14) P Mode (10) (15) Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu (1) Lens (7) Power button (1) (2) Microphone (8) Wi-Fi antenna area (2) Strap mount (3) Speaker (9) Flash (3) AV OUT (Audio/video output) / DIGITAL terminal (4) (5) Zoom lever Shooting: [ [ Playback: [ [ (10) [ (Flash pop up)] switch (telephoto)] / (wide angle)] (magnify)] / (index)] Shutter button (6) Lamp (11) (N-Mark)* (12) Tripod socket (13) DC coupler terminal cover (14) Memory card/battery cover Screen (LCD monitor) (9) Indicator (10) [ (Mobile Device Connection)] button (4) HDMITM terminal (5) Mode switch (6) [ (Playback)] button (Auto Zoom)] / [ (Wi-Fi)] / (7) [ Up button (8) [ (Macro)] / Left button Accessories Appendix (11) Movie button (12) FUNC. (Function) / SET button (13) [ (Flash)] / Right button (14) [ (15) [ Index (Display)] / Down button (Menu)] button * Used with NFC features (= 90). 4 Table of Contents Before Use Advanced Guide Camera Basics................................................................. 24 On/Off...................................................................................... 24 Before Use Basic Guide Package Contents..................................................................... 2 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..............................25 Power Saving in Shooting Mode............................................25 Power Saving in Playback Mode............................................25 Compatible Memory Cards....................................................... 2 Shutter Button......................................................................... 25 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.................................. 3 Shooting Display Options........................................................ 26 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Conventions in This Guide........................................................ 3 Using the FUNC. Menu........................................................... 26 Other Shooting Modes Part Names............................................................................... 4 Using the Menu Screen........................................................... 27 Common Camera Operations..................................................11 On-Screen Keyboard.............................................................. 28 Safety Precautions.................................................................. 13 Indicator Display...................................................................... 29 Initial Information............................................................... 2 Basic Guide Basic Operations............................................................. 16 Initial Preparations.................................................................. 16 Advanced Guide Camera Basics P Mode Playback Mode Clock....................................................................................... 29 Wi-Fi Functions Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode....................................... 30 Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings........................... 30 Attaching the Strap.....................................................................16 Holding the Camera....................................................................16 Charging the Battery Pack..........................................................17 Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card.............................18 Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card......................18 Setting the Date and Time..........................................................19 Changing the Date and Time..................................................19 Display Language.......................................................................20 Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................30 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode....................................................32 Digest Movie Playback...........................................................32 Still Images/Movies................................................................33 Still Images.............................................................................33 Movies....................................................................................33 Scene Icons................................................................................34 Image Stabilization Icons............................................................35 On-Screen Frames.....................................................................35 Trying the Camera Out............................................................ 21 Common, Convenient Features.............................................. 36 Shooting (Smart Auto)................................................................21 Viewing.......................................................................................22 Erasing Images......................................................................23 Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)...........................36 Zooming Automatically as the Subject Moves (Auto Zoom).......36 Using the Self-Timer...................................................................37 Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake........................38 Customizing the Self-Timer....................................................38 Adding a Date Stamp.................................................................39 Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 5 Continuous Shooting..................................................................40 Image Customization Features............................................... 40 Changing the Aspect Ratio.........................................................40 Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size)...........41 Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)...................................................41 Red-Eye Correction....................................................................41 Changing Movie Image Quality..................................................42 Helpful Shooting Features....................................................... 42 Displaying Grid Lines..................................................................42 Magnifying the Area in Focus.....................................................43 Checking for Closed Eyes..........................................................43 Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................44 Deactivating Image Stabilization............................................44 Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting......................................................................44 Customizing Camera Operation.............................................. 45 Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam...............................................45 Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp................................45 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots...........................46 Changing the Image Display Period after Shots....................46 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots..........................46 Other Shooting Modes..................................................... 47 Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)........................................................................ 47 Image Display during Playback..................................................48 Choosing Effects........................................................................48 Specific Scenes....................................................................... 49 Applying Special Effects.......................................................... 50 Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).............51 Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)..............51 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips)............................................................52 Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect)............52 Shooting in Monochrome............................................................53 Special Modes for Other Purposes......................................... 53 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter)..................53 Auto Shooting after Smile Detection......................................53 Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer)...........54 Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face Self-Timer)....................................................................54 Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter)..................................55 High-Speed Continuous Shooting (High-Speed Burst)..............56 Camera Basics P Mode.............................................................................. 57 Playback Mode Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)........................................ 57 Wi-Fi Functions Image Brightness (Exposure).................................................. 58 Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation).............58 Changing the Metering Method..................................................58 Changing the ISO Speed............................................................59 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...................................59 Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Image Colors........................................................................... 60 Adjusting White Balance.............................................................60 Custom White Balance...........................................................60 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).................................60 Custom Color.........................................................................61 Index Shooting Range and Focusing................................................ 62 Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)......................................................62 Shooting Distant Subjects (Infinity).............................................62 Digital Tele-Converter.................................................................63 Changing the AF Frame Mode...................................................63 Face AiAF...............................................................................63 6 Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)......................64 Center.....................................................................................65 Shooting with Servo AF..........................................................65 Changing the Focus Setting.......................................................66 Flash....................................................................................... 66 Changing the Flash Mode..........................................................66 Auto........................................................................................67 On...........................................................................................67 Slow Synchro.........................................................................67 Off...........................................................................................67 Other Settings......................................................................... 67 Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality).....................67 Changing the IS Mode Settings..................................................68 Playback Mode................................................................. 69 Viewing.................................................................................... 69 Switching Display Modes............................................................70 Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights).......................71 Histogram...............................................................................71 GPS Information Display........................................................71 Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)...........................................................................71 Viewing by Date......................................................................72 Browsing and Filtering Images................................................ 72 Protecting Images................................................................... 77 Using the Menu..........................................................................77 Choosing Images Individually.....................................................78 Selecting a Range......................................................................78 Protecting All Images at Once....................................................79 Clearing All Protection at Once..............................................79 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Erasing Images....................................................................... 79 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Erasing All Images......................................................................80 Choosing a Selection Method................................................80 Choosing Images Individually.................................................80 Selecting a Range..................................................................81 Specifying All Images at Once................................................81 Other Shooting Modes P Mode Rotating Images...................................................................... 81 Playback Mode Using the Menu..........................................................................82 Deactivating Auto Rotation.........................................................82 Wi-Fi Functions Tagging Images as Favorites.................................................. 83 Setting Menu Using the Menu..........................................................................83 Editing Still Images.................................................................. 84 Resizing Images.........................................................................84 Cropping.....................................................................................84 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors).................................85 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)...................................86 Correcting Red-Eye....................................................................86 Accessories Appendix Index Editing Movies......................................................................... 87 Navigating through Images in an Index......................................72 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions..........................73 Viewing Individual Images in a Group........................................74 Wi-Fi Functions................................................................ 89 Image Viewing Options........................................................... 75 Available Wi-Fi Features......................................................... 89 Magnifying Images.....................................................................75 Viewing Slideshows....................................................................75 Changing Slideshow Settings.................................................76 Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle).....................76 Sending Images to a Smartphone........................................... 90 Editing Digest Movies.................................................................88 Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone................90 Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode.......................................................................90 7 Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode......92 Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button......................93 Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu.............................94 Using Another Access Point.......................................................96 Previous Access Points..............................................................97 Preparing the Camera.......................................................... 112 Preparing the Computer....................................................... 112 Sending Images........................................................................ 113 Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your Smartphone.......................................................................... 113 Saving Images to a Computer................................................. 97 Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the Camera............................................................................114 Preparing to Register a Computer..............................................97 Checking Your Computer Environment..................................97 Installing the Software............................................................97 Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection (Windows Only)......................................................................98 Saving Images to a Connected Computer..................................99 Confirming Access Point Compatibility...................................99 Using WPS-Compatible Access Points..................................99 Connecting to Listed Access Points.....................................101 Previous Access Points........................................................102 Sending Images to a Registered Web Service...................... 103 Registering Web Services........................................................103 Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY...............................103 Registering Other Web Services..........................................105 Uploading Images to Web Services.........................................105 Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer........... 106 Sending Images to Another Camera..................................... 108 Image Sending Options......................................................... 109 Sending Multiple Images..........................................................109 Select a range......................................................................109 Sending Images Tagged as Favorites.................................. 110 Notes on Sending Images........................................................ 110 Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size)......... 111 Adding Comments.................................................................... 111 Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync).........................112 Initial Preparations.................................................................... 112 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Geotagging Images on the Camera......................................... 114 Shooting Remotely................................................................... 115 Other Shooting Modes Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings...........................................116 Editing Connection Information................................................ 116 Changing a Device Nickname.............................................. 116 Erasing Connection Information........................................... 116 Changing the Camera Nickname............................................. 117 Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default.................................... 117 P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu................................................................... 118 Setting Menu Adjusting Basic Camera Functions........................................118 Silencing Camera Operations................................................... 118 Adjusting the Volume................................................................ 118 Hiding Hints and Tips................................................................ 119 Date and Time.......................................................................... 119 World Clock.............................................................................. 119 Lens Retraction Timing.............................................................120 Using Eco Mode.......................................................................120 Power-Saving Adjustment........................................................120 Screen Brightness....................................................................121 Hiding the Start-Up Screen.......................................................121 Formatting Memory Cards........................................................121 Low-Level Formatting...........................................................122 File Numbering.........................................................................122 Date-Based Image Storage......................................................123 Metric / Non-Metric Display......................................................123 Accessories Appendix Index 8 Checking Certification Logos....................................................123 Display Language.....................................................................123 Adjusting Other Settings...........................................................124 Restoring Default Camera Settings..........................................124 Accessories.................................................................... 125 System Map.......................................................................... 125 Optional Accessories............................................................. 126 Power Supplies.........................................................................126 Flash Units................................................................................127 Other Accessories....................................................................127 Printers.....................................................................................127 Using Optional Accessories.................................................. 128 Playback on a TV.....................................................................128 Playback on a High-Definition TV.........................................128 Playback on a Standard-Definition TV.................................129 Powering the Camera with Household Power..........................129 Using the Software................................................................ 130 Computer Connections via a Cable..........................................131 Checking Your Computer Environment................................131 Installing the Software..............................................................131 Saving Images to a Computer..................................................132 Printing Images..................................................................... 133 Easy Print.................................................................................133 Configuring Print Settings.........................................................134 Cropping Images before Printing..........................................135 Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................135 Available Layout Options......................................................136 Printing ID Photos................................................................136 Printing Movie Scenes..............................................................136 Movie Printing Options.........................................................136 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)...................................137 Configuring Print Settings.....................................................137 Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.............................137 Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images...........................138 Setting Up Printing for All Images.........................................138 Clearing All Images from the Print List.................................138 Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)...................138 Adding Images to a Photobook................................................139 Choosing a Selection Method..............................................139 Adding Images Individually...................................................139 Adding All Images to a Photobook.......................................139 Removing All Images from a Photobook..............................139 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Appendix......................................................................... 140 Playback Mode Troubleshooting..................................................................... 140 On-Screen Messages........................................................... 144 Wi-Fi Functions On-Screen Information.......................................................... 146 Shooting (Information Display).................................................146 Battery Level........................................................................146 Playback (Detailed Information Display)...................................147 Summary of Movie Control Panel.........................................147 Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Functions and Menu Tables.................................................. 148 Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode............................148 FUNC. Menu.............................................................................149 Shooting Tab.............................................................................151 Set Up Tab................................................................................154 Playback Tab............................................................................154 Print Tab...................................................................................155 Playback Mode FUNC. Menu...................................................155 Index Handling Precautions............................................................ 155 Specifications........................................................................ 156 Camera Specifications..............................................................156 Wi-Fi.....................................................................................156 9 Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm film equivalent)..............156 Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time...............157 Number of Shots per Memory Card.....................................157 Recording Time per Memory Card.......................................157 Flash Range.........................................................................158 Shooting Range....................................................................158 Continuous Shooting Speed.................................................158 Shutter Speed......................................................................158 Aperture................................................................................158 Battery Pack NB-6LH...........................................................158 Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE.......................................158 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Index..................................................................................... 159 Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions......................................... 161 Playback Mode Radio Wave Interference Precautions......................................161 Security Precautions.................................................................161 Trademarks and Licensing...................................................162 Disclaimer.............................................................................162 Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 10 Common Camera Operations Shooting ●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode, Hybrid Auto Mode) -- = 30, = 32 ●● See several effects applied to each shot, using camera-determined settings (Creative Shot Mode) -- = 47 Shooting people well Portraits (= 49) Basic Guide Vivid Colors (= 50) Poster Effect (= 50) Fish-Eye Effect (= 51) Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Miniature Effect (= 51) Toy Camera Effect (= 52) Monochrome (= 53) Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Focus on faces -- = 30, = 49, = 63 Against Snow (= 49) Matching specific scenes Low Light (= 49) Before Use Applying special effects Fireworks (= 49) Playback Mode ●● Without using the flash (Flash Off) -- = 30, = 67 Wi-Fi Functions ●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) -- = 37, = 54 Setting Menu ●● Add a date stamp -- = 39 Accessories ●● Movie clips and photos together (Movie Digest) -- = 32 Appendix Index 11 View ●● View images (Playback Mode) -- = 69 ●● Automatic playback (Slideshow) -- = 75 ●● On a TV -- = 128 ●● On a computer -- = 131 ●● Browse through images quickly -- = 72 ●● Erase images -- = 79 Save ●● Save images to a computer via a cable -- = 132 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Use Wi-Fi Functions Camera Basics ●● Send images to a smartphone -- = 90 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Share images online -- = 103 Other Shooting Modes ●● Send images to a computer -- = 97 P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Shoot/View Movies Setting Menu ●● Shoot movies -- = 30 Accessories ●● View movies (Playback Mode) -- = 69 Print Appendix Index ●● Print pictures -- = 133 12 Safety Precautions ●● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly. ●● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and other persons from being injured or incurring property damage. ●● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use. Warning Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death. ●● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes. This could damage your eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants when using the flash. ●● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants. A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. ●● Use only recommended power sources. ●● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product. ●● Do not peel off the adhesive covering, if the battery pack has it. ●● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts. ●● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when dropped. ●● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally. ●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product. ●● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside. This could result in electrical shock or fire. If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately. ●● Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. This could damage your eyesight. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in. This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the product and distance yourself from it. Other Shooting Modes ●● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries. P Mode ●● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame. This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water. ●● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions. -- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area. -- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands. -- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet. -- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals or plug. -- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if your product uses one. This could result in electrical shock or fire. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited. The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities. 13 ●● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods. Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-temperature burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin. Caution Denotes the possibility of injury. ●● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects. ●● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens. This could lead to injury or damage the camera. ●● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts. If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments. ●● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing. This could result in burns or damage to the flash. ●● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places: -- Places subject to direct sunlight -- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) -- Humid or dusty places These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash. This could result in injury. Caution Denotes the possibility of property damage. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera. Other Shooting Modes ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push the flash down or pry it open. This may cause the product to malfunction. P Mode Playback Mode ●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a cotton swab or cloth. The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the product to malfunction. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using the product. Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage. ●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators. Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions. ●● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed for prolonged periods. ●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use. Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire. ●● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly. If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass may lead to cuts. ●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets. Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion, resulting in product damage or fire. Accessories Appendix Index 14 ●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals reversed. This may cause the product to malfunction. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it faces the body), if your product’s screen closes. Other Shooting Modes ●● Do not attach any hard objects to the product. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 15 Basic Guide Initial Preparations Before Use Basic Guide Prepare for shooting as follows. Advanced Guide Attaching the Strap Basic Operations Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and playback (2) (1) Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Thread the end of the strap through the strap mount (1), and then pull the other end of the strap through the loop on the threaded end (2). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Holding the Camera Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Place the strap around your wrist. ●● When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving. If you have raised the flash, do not rest your fingers on it. Accessories Appendix Index 16 Charging the Battery Pack Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery pack charged. (1) (2) 1 Insert the battery pack. ●● After aligning the marks on the battery pack and charger, insert the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and down (2). ●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 157). ●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. ●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Charge the battery pack. P Mode ●● CB-2LY: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the charger into a power outlet (2). Playback Mode ●● CB-2LYE: Plug the power cord into the charger, then plug the other end into a power outlet. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● The charging lamp turns orange, and charging begins. Accessories ●● When charging is finished, the lamp turns green. (1) (2) 3 Remove the battery pack. Appendix Index ●● After unplugging the battery charger, remove the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and up (2). ●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. ●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. 17 Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card 4 Close the cover. (1) (2) Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately). Note that before using a memory card that is new or has been formatted in another device, you should format the memory card with this camera (= 121). 1 Open the cover. (2) (1) ●● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2). ●● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as you slide it, until it clicks into the closed position (2). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 157). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card 2 Insert the battery pack. ●● Holding the battery pack with the terminals (1) facing as shown, press the battery lock (2) in the direction of the arrow and insert the battery pack until the lock clicks shut. (1) (2) ●● If you insert the battery pack facing the wrong way, it cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and locks when inserted. 3 Check the card’s write-protect switch and insert the memory card. P Mode Remove the battery pack. ●● Open the cover and press the battery lock in the direction of the arrow. Playback Mode ●● The battery pack will pop up. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Remove the memory card. ●● Push the memory card in until it clicks, and then slowly release it. Appendix Index ●● The memory card will pop up. ●● Recording is not possible on memory cards with a write-protect switch when the switch is in the locked position. Slide the switch to the unlocked position. ●● Insert the memory card with the label (1) facing as shown until it clicks into place. (1) ●● Make sure the memory card is facing the right way when you insert it. Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the camera. 18 4 Finish the setup process. Setting the Date and Time Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date. You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (= 39). 1 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the power button. Before Use ●● Press the [ ] button when finished. After a confirmation message, the setting screen is no longer displayed. ●● To turn off the camera, press the power button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/ Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed. ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 2 Set the date and time. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item. ●● Press the [ ][ date and time. ] buttons to specify the ●● When finished, press the [ ] button. P Mode Playback Mode Changing the Date and Time Wi-Fi Functions Adjust the date and time as follows. Setting Menu 1 Access the menu screen. ●● Press the [ Accessories ] button. Appendix 3 Specify your home time zone. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your home time zone. 2 Choose [Date/Time]. ●● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ tab. Index ] ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Change the date and time. ●● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19) to adjust the settings. ●● Press the [ menu screen. ] button to close the 19 ●● The camera has a built-in date/time battery (backup battery). Date/time settings will be retained for about 3 weeks after the battery pack is removed. ●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 126), even if the camera is left off. ●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19). ●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after ] button. pressing the [ ] button before you press the [ In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2. ●● You can also change the display language by pressing the ] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab. [ Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Display Language P Mode Change the display language as needed. Playback Mode 1 Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ Wi-Fi Functions ] button. Setting Menu 2 Access the setting screen. Accessories ●● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then immediately press the [ ] button. 3 Appendix Index Set the display language. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the display language has been set, the setting screen is no longer displayed. 20 3 Compose the shot. Trying the Camera Out Still Images Movies Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies, and then view them. Shooting (Smart Auto) For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. 1 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the power button. ●● The startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Set the mode switch to [ ●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 4 Camera Basics 1) Focus. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Shoot. Shooting Still Images ●● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway down. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. Accessories Appendix ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. ●● Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper right of the screen. ●● Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. Index 2) Shoot. ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. 21 ●● After displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. Recording Movies 1) Start recording. (1) ●● Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. ●● Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. Before Use Viewing After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ Camera Basics ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Your last shot is displayed. 2 Choose an image. Other Shooting Modes ●● To view the previous image, press the [ ] button. To view the next image, press the [ ] button. P Mode Playback Mode ●● Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. Wi-Fi Functions 2) Finish recording. Setting Menu ●● Press the movie button again to stop recording. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. Accessories ●● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode), press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons for at least one second. In this mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images. Appendix Index ●● To return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. ●● Movies are identified by a [ To play movies, go to step 3. ] icon. 22 3 Play movies. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● Playback now begins, and after the movie is finished, [ ] is displayed. ●● To adjust the volume, press the [ buttons during playback. ][ ●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 80). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ] Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Erasing Images Playback Mode You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. Wi-Fi Functions 1 Choose an image to erase. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. Accessories 2 Erase the image. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. Appendix Index ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The current image is now erased. ●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. 23 Advanced Guide Before Use On/Off Basic Guide Shooting Mode Advanced Guide ●● Press the power button to turn the camera on and prepare for shooting. Camera Basics Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including shooting and playback options Camera Basics ●● To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Playback Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on and view your shots. ●● To turn the camera off, press the [ button again. P Mode ] Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ] button. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway (= 25). ●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is ] button. retracted by pressing the [ Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 24 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity. Power Saving in Shooting Mode The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 25). Power Saving in Playback Mode The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity. ●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if you prefer (= 120). ●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via Wi-Fi (= 89), or when connected to a computer (= 132). Before Use Shutter Button Basic Guide To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way down to shoot. In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button halfway or all the way down. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.) Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice, and frames are displayed around image areas in focus. P Mode Playback Mode 2 Press all the way down. (From the halfway position, press fully to shoot.) Wi-Fi Functions ●● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. Setting Menu ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. Accessories Appendix ●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway. ●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends. Index 25 Shooting Display Options Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen Information” (= 146). Before Use Using the FUNC. Menu Configure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows. Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode (= 149) or playback mode (= 155). Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the FUNC. menu. ●● Press the [ Information is displayed Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] button. Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a menu item. No information is displayed (2) (1) ●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images. ●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (= 70). P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a menu item (1), and then press the [ ] or [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Available options (2) are listed next to menu items, on the right. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Depending on the menu item, functions can be specified simply by pressing the [ ] or [ ] button, or another screen is displayed for configuring the function. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ item. ][ ] buttons to choose an Index ] icon can ●● Options labeled with a [ be configured by pressing the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu items, press the [ ] button. 26 4 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● The screen before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1 is displayed again, showing the option you configured. ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 124). Before Use Using the Menu Screen Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 151 – = 155). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Access the menu screen. ●● Press the [ 2 ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Choose a tab. Playback Mode ●● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab. ●● After you have pressed the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a tab initially, you can switch between tabs by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 27 3 Choose a menu item. ●● Press the [ item. ][ ] buttons to choose an ●● For menu items with options not shown, first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch screens, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to select the menu item. ●● To return to the previous screen, press ] button. the [ Before Use On-Screen Keyboard Basic Guide Use the on-screen keyboard to enter information for Wi-Fi connections (= 90). Note that the length and type of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Entering Characters Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose a character, and then press the [ ] button to enter it. Other Shooting Modes 4 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. 5 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1. P Mode Moving the Cursor ●● Choose [ button. Playback Mode ] or [ ] and press the [ ] Setting Menu Deleting Characters ●● Choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. The previous character will be deleted. Confirming Input and Returning to the Previous Screen ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 124). Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ Accessories Appendix Index ] button. 28 Indicator Display The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks depending on the camera status. Color Indicator Status On Green Blinking Camera Status Connected to a computer (= 132), or display off (= 25, = 120) Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images, shooting long exposures, (= 55), or connecting/transmitting via Wi-Fi Before Use Clock Basic Guide You can check the current time. ●● Press and hold the [ ] button. Advanced Guide ●● The current time appears. Camera Basics ●● If you hold the camera vertically while using the clock function, it will switch to vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to change the display color. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button again to cancel the clock display. P Mode ●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ press the power button to display the clock. ] button, then Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 29 Shooting with Camera-Determined Settings For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Shooting (Smart Auto) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images Movies Other Shooting Modes 1 Turn the camera on. P Mode ●● Press the power button. Playback Mode ●● The startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ Wi-Fi Functions ] mode. ●● Set the mode switch to [ Setting Menu ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper right of the screen (= 34, = 35). ●● Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 30 3 Compose the shot. (1) 2) Shoot. ●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position is displayed.) ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom lever all the way toward [ ] (telephoto) or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in or out slowly, move it just a little in the desired direction. ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. ●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 1) Start recording. 1) Focus. (1) Playback Mode ●● Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). Wi-Fi Functions ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. Setting Menu Accessories ●● Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. ●● Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. ●● If [Raise the flash] appears on the screen, move the [ ] switch to raise the flash. It will fire when shooting. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. Advanced Guide Recording Movies Shooting Still Images ●● Several AF frames are displayed when multiple areas are in focus. Basic Guide ●● After displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. 4 Shoot. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. Before Use Appendix Index 2) Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed. ●● To resize the subject, repeat the operations in step 3. However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded. Note that movies shot at zoom factors shown in blue will look grainy. ●● When you recompose shots, the focus, brightness, and colors will be automatically adjusted. 31 3) Finish recording. ●● Press the movie button again to stop recording. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. ●● Recording will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode Still Images Movies You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images. The camera records 2 – 4-second clips of scenes before each shot, which are later combined in a digest movie. 1 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Set the mode switch to [ ]. 2 Compose the shot. ●● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 30) to compose the shot and focus. ●● For more impressive digest movies, aim the camera at subjects about four seconds before shooting still images. 3 Shoot. ●● Follow step 4 in “Shooting (Smart Auto)” (= 30) to shoot a still image. ●● Battery life is shorter in this mode than in [ ] mode, because digest movies are recorded for each shot. ●● A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image ] mode, or immediately after turning the camera on, choosing [ operating the camera in other ways. ●● Camera operating sounds will be recorded in digest movies. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Digest movie quality is [ ] and cannot be changed. ●● Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the self-timer. ●● Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following ] mode. cases even if they were recorded on the same day in [ -- The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB, or the total recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds. -- The digest movie is protected (= 77). -- Daylight saving time (= 19) or time zone (= 119) settings are changed. -- A new folder is created (= 123). ●● Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased. ●● If you prefer to record digest movies without still images, adjust the setting in advance. Choose MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Digest Type] > [No Stills] (= 27). ●● Individual chapters can be edited (= 88). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index Digest Movie Playback Display a still image shot in [ ] mode to play the digest movie created on the same day, or specify the date of the digest movie to play (= 71). ●● The camera records both a still image and movie clip. The clip, which ends with the still image and a shutter sound, forms a single chapter in the digest movie. 32 Still Images/Movies ●● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press the ] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then [ press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off]. Still Images ●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. ●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 158). ●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the range of focus (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 158). ●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be lit when shooting in low-light conditions. ●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again. ●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used. Movies Before Use ●● Before shooting a movie, lower the flash with your finger. Be careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie. Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics (1) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be recorded. ●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (= 44). P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories ●● Audio recording is monaural. Appendix Index ●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots (= 46). 33 Scene Icons When Shooting Other Subjects Still Images Movies In [ ] and [ ] modes, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color. When Shooting People Background People In Motion*1 Shadows on Face*1 Bright – Bright and Backlit Icon Background Color – In Motion*1 At Close Range Light Blue Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Bright Gray Bright and Backlit Camera Basics With Blue Sky Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Light Blue Blue Sky and Backlit – Other Shooting Modes Orange Spotlights Dark P Mode Dark Blue Dark, Using Tripod *2 – Playback Mode – Wi-Fi Functions *1 Not displayed for movies. *2 Displayed in dark scenes when the camera is held still, as when mounted on a tripod. Spotlights Dark Dark, Using Tripod Other Subjects Sunsets Gray With Blue Sky Blue Sky and Backlit Background Icon Background Color Setting Menu Dark Blue *2 – – ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 57) if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or brightness. Accessories Appendix Index 34 Image Stabilization Icons Before Use On-Screen Frames Still Images Movies Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [ ] and [ ] modes. Image stabilization for still images (Normal) Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)* Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is used (Hybrid IS). Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as when shooting while walking (Dynamic) Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting movies at telephoto (Powered) No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS). * Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake. Still Images Movies In [ ] mode, a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF). P Mode Playback Mode ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 57) if no frames are displayed, if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed on the background or similar areas. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 44). In this case, an IS icon is not displayed. ] mode, no [ ] icon is displayed. ●● In [ 35 Common, Convenient Features Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) Still Images Movies When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 72x enlargement. 1 Move the zoom lever toward [ ]. ●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending on the zoom range. -- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy. -- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus). -- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy. ●● Because the blue range will not be available at some recording pixel settings (= 41), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by following step 1. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Hold the lever until zooming stops. ●● Zooming stops at the largest zoom factor before the image becomes noticeably grainy, which is then indicated on the screen. (1) 2 Move the zoom lever toward [ again. ] ●● (1) is the current zoom factor. ●● The camera zooms in even closer on the subject. P Mode ●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 27) > [ [Digital Zoom] > [Off]. ] tab > Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Zooming Automatically as the Subject Moves (Auto Zoom) Still Images Setting Menu Accessories Movies The camera automatically zooms in and out to keep a detected face (= 30) at a constant size. If the person moves closer, the camera automatically zooms out, and vice versa. Appendix Index 36 1 Enter Auto Zoom mode. ●● Press the [ ●● [ ] button. ] is displayed. ●● A white frame is displayed around the detected face, and the camera zooms in and out automatically to keep the subject on the screen. ●● If more than one face is detected, a white frame is displayed around the main subject’s face and gray frames are displayed around up to two more faces. The camera zooms in and out automatically to keep the subjects on the screen. 2 Shoot. ●● Even after your shot, the frame is still displayed and the camera continues to zoom automatically. ] is ●● Press the [ ] button again. [ displayed and Auto Zoom is disabled. ●● Faces may not be detected at some zoom factors, or if the subject’s head is tilted or facing the camera indirectly. ●● You can also zoom in or out with the zoom lever, but the original zoom factor will be restored in a few seconds after you release the lever. ●● Auto Zoom is disabled in the following situations. -- When changing shooting modes ] button, movie button, or [ ] are pressed -- When the [ -- When [ ] is pressed while the flash is raised ●● If the person whose face is detected moves toward the edge of the screen, the camera zooms out to keep the person in view. ●● The zoom factor cannot be changed after you press the shutter button all the way down in self-timer mode (= 37). ●● In order to display the subject on the screen consistently when the subject is moving or in certain shooting conditions, the face may not be displayed at a constant size. ●● When no face is detected, the camera zooms to a certain level and stops zooming until a face is detected. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Using the Self-Timer P Mode Still Images Movies Playback Mode With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. Wi-Fi Functions 1 Configure the setting. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 26). Accessories ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Appendix ] is Index 37 2 Shoot. Customizing the Self-Timer Movies You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10). 1 Choose [ ●● For Movies: Press the movie button. ●● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp will blink and the camera will play a selftimer sound. ]. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 37), choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. ●● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking and sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the [ ] button. 2 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Configure the setting. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the delay or number of shots. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a value, and then press the [ ] button. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [ in step 1. ] ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Playback Mode ] is Wi-Fi Functions ●● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 37) to shoot. Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake Still Images Before Use Still Images ●● For Still Images: Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject, and then press it all the way down. Setting Menu Movies This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot. ●● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 37) and choose [ ]. Accessories ●● For movies shot using the self-timer, the delay setting represents the delay before recording begins, but the shots setting has no effect. Appendix Index ●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. ●● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 37) to shoot. ●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. ●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) 38 Adding a Date Stamp Still Images Movies The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-right corner. However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm beforehand that the date and time are correct (= 19). ●● Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows. However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may cause it to be printed twice. -- Print using printer functions (= 133) -- Use camera DPOF print settings (= 137) to print Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Date Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 27). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ] is Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Shoot. ●● As you take shots, the camera adds the shooting date or time to the lower-right corner of images. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Date stamps cannot be edited or removed. 39 Continuous Shooting Before Use Image Customization Features Still Images Basic Guide Movies In [ ] mode, hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 158). 1 Configure the setting. Advanced Guide Changing the Aspect Ratio Still Images Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 26). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. ●● Once the setting is complete, the screen aspect ratio will be updated. P Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Playback Mode ] is Other Shooting Modes Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Shoot. ●● Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● During continuous shooting, focus, exposure and color are locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway. ●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 37). ●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. ●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. Accessories Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices. This is the same aspect ratio as 35 mm film. It is used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes. Native aspect ratio of the camera screen. Used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display devices. Also used for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes. Appendix Index Square aspect ratio. ●● Not available in [ ] mode. 40 Changing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) Still Images Movies Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each recording pixel setting can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 157). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). Before Use Red-Eye Correction Still Images Movies Red-eye that occurs in flash photography can be automatically corrected as follows. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 27). Other Shooting Modes ●● The option you configured is now displayed. P Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Configure the setting. Guidelines for Choosing Recording Pixel Setting Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.) Setting Menu ●● Choose [Red-Eye Corr.], and then choose [On] (= 27). Accessories ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Appendix ] is ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Index 3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard For e-mailing and similar purposes ●● Not available in [ ●● Red-eye correction may be applied to image areas other than eyes (if the camera misinterprets red eye makeup as red pupils, for example). ] mode. ●● You can also correct existing images (= 86). ●● You can also access the screen in step 2 when the flash is up by ] pressing the [ ] button and immediately pressing the [ button. 41 Changing Movie Image Quality Before Use Helpful Shooting Features Still Images Basic Guide Movies 3 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 157). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Advanced Guide Displaying Grid Lines Still Images Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal reference while shooting. ●● Press the [ Lines] on the [ [On] (= 27). ] button, choose [Grid ] tab, and then choose Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Once the setting is complete, grid lines are displayed on the screen. Playback Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Image Quality Recording Pixels Frame Rate Accessories Details 1920 x 1080 30 fps For shooting in Full HD 1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD 640 x 480 30 fps For shooting in standard definition Appendix ●● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots. Index ●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen. These image areas are not recorded. 42 Magnifying the Area in Focus Before Use Checking for Closed Eyes Still Images Movies You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AFPoint Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 27). Still Images Movies [ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 27). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 2 Check the focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The face detected as the main subject is now magnified. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the shutter button is pressed halfway. -- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the camera detects subject movement -- When digital zoom is used (= 36) -- When Tracking AF is used (= 64) -- When a TV is used as a display (= 128) ] mode. ●● Not available in [ 2 Shoot. Setting Menu ●● [ ] flashes when the camera detects a person whose eyes are closed. Accessories ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. Appendix ●● When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this function is only available for the final shot. ●● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (= 46). ●● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode (= 40). Index 43 Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting Changing the IS Mode Settings Still Images Movies Deactivating Image Stabilization You should set the image stabilization function to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera. 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 27). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [IS Mode], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off]. Continuous Off Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 35). Deactivates image stabilization. Still Images Movies Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. Reducing the effect of image stabilization enables you to shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Follow the steps in “Changing the IS Mode Settings” (= 44) to access the [IS Settings] screen. Other Shooting Modes ●● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose [2] (= 27). P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at the same size shown before shooting. ●● [Dynamic IS] cannot be selected when [IS Mode] is set to [Off] (= 44). ●● For [ ], [Dynamic IS] is fixed on [1]. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 44 Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows. For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen” (= 27). Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam Still Images Before Use Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp Customizing Camera Operation Movies The lamp (front) lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions. If you prefer, you can deactivate this lamp. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AFassist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 27). Still Images Movies You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 27). Other Shooting Modes 2 Configure the setting. P Mode ●● Choose [Red-Eye Lamp], and then choose [Off] (= 27). Playback Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. Wi-Fi Functions ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 45 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Changing the Image Display Style after Shots Still Images Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows. Movies 1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (= 46). You can change how long images are displayed and what information is displayed immediately after shooting. ●● Choose [Display Time], and then choose the desired option. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Quick]. Quick 2 sec., 4 sec., 8 sec. Hold Off Displays images only until you can shoot again. Displays images for the specified time. Even while the shot is displayed, you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again. Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway. No image display after shots. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. shooting] screen. 2 Advanced Guide ●● Choose [Display Info], and then choose the desired option. 1 Access the [Review image after Configure the setting. Basic Guide 2 Configure the setting. Changing the Image Display Period after Shots ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Review image after shooting] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 27). Before Use Other Shooting Modes P Mode Off Displays only the image. Detailed Displays shooting details (= 147). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● When [Display Time] (= 46) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. ●● By pressing the [ ] button while an image is displayed after shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are not changed. By pressing the [ ] button, you can do the following operations. -- Protect (= 77) -- Favorites (= 83) -- Erase (= 79) Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 46 Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot) Still Images Other Shooting Modes Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special functions Movies Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions, automatically applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the subject. Six still images are recorded for each shot. You can capture multiple still images with effects using camera-determined settings. 1 Enter [ Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] mode. ●● Set the mode switch to [ Other Shooting Modes ]. P Mode 2 Shoot. Playback Mode ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. As you shoot, the shutter sound is played three times. Wi-Fi Functions ●● After the six images are displayed in succession, they are displayed simultaneously for about two seconds. ●● To keep the images displayed until you press the shutter button halfway, press the [ ] button. For full-screen display in this state, choose an image by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● To return to the original display, press the ] button. [ ●● Shooting will take some time when the flash fires, but hold the camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times. ●● The six images are managed together as a group (= 74). ●● Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only available immediately after you shoot. 47 Image Display during Playback The six images from each shot are managed together as a group, and only the first image in the series is displayed during playback. To indicate that the image is part of a group, [ ] is displayed in the upper left of the screen. Before Use Choosing Effects Still Images You can choose effects for images captured in [ ●● After choosing [ [ ] button. Movies ] mode. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ] mode, press the Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an effect, and then press the [ ] button. ●● If you erase a grouped image (= 79), all images in the group are also erased. Be careful when erasing images. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Grouped images can be played back individually (= 74) and ungrouped (= 74). ●● Protecting (= 77) a grouped image will protect all images in the group. ●● Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image Search (= 72) or Smart Shuffle (= 76). In this case, images are temporarily ungrouped. ●● The following actions are not available for grouped images: magnifying (= 75), tagging as favorites (= 83), editing (= 84), printing (= 133), setting up individual image printing (= 137), or adding to a photobook (= 139). To do these things, either view grouped images individually (= 74) or cancel grouping (= 74) first. ●● Simultaneous display as shown in step 2 is only available immediately after you shoot. Auto All effects Retro Images resemble old photos Monochrome Images are generated in one color Special Bold, distinctive-looking images Natural Subdued, natural-looking images P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 48 Shooting under Low Light (Low Light) Specific Scenes Still Images Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will automatically configure the settings for optimal shots. 1 Enter [ ●● Shoot with minimal camera and subject shake even in low-light conditions. ] mode. ●● Set the mode switch to [ Movies Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ]. Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds (Snow) Still Images 2 Choose a shooting mode. Still Images Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks) Still Images Shooting Portraits (Portrait) Movies ●● Bright, natural-colored shots of people against snowy backgrounds. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and then choose a shooting mode (= 26). 3 Shoot. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Wi-Fi Functions Movies ●● Vivid shots of fireworks. Setting Menu Movies Accessories ●● Take shots of people with a softening effect. Shooting Evening Scenes without Using a Tripod (Handheld Night Scene) Still Images Movies ●● Beautiful shots of evening scenes or portraits with evening scenery in the background, without the need to hold the camera very still (as with a tripod). Appendix ●● Subjects appear larger in [ ] mode compared to other modes. ●● In [ ] mode, shots may look grainy because the ISO speed (= 59) is increased to suit the shooting conditions. ●● Because the camera will shoot continuously in [ ] mode, hold it steady while shooting. ●● In [ ] mode, excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 44). Index ●● A single image is created by combining consecutive shots, reducing camera shake and image noise. 49 ●● When you use a tripod for evening scenes, shooting in [ ] mode instead of [ ] mode will give better results (= 30). ●● [ ] mode recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and cannot be changed. ●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined. Before Use Applying Special Effects Basic Guide Add a variety of effects to images when shooting. Advanced Guide 1 Choose a shooting mode. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) to choose a shooting mode. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Shoot. Other Shooting Modes Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid) Still Images Movies P Mode ●● Shots in rich, vivid colors. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Posterized Shots (Poster Effect) Still Images Setting Menu Movies Accessories ●● Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration. Appendix Index ●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 50 Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) Still Images Movies Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens. 1 Choose [ Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose an effect level. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an effect level, and then press the [ ] button. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. Still Images Movies Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and below your selected area. You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded. 1 Choose [ Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ]. P Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. Playback Mode ●● A white frame is displayed, indicating the image area that will not be blurred. 2 Wi-Fi Functions Choose the area to keep in focus. ●● Press the [ Setting Menu ] button. ●● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame, and press the [ ][ ] buttons to move it. Accessories Appendix 3 For movies, choose the movie Index playback speed. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the speed. 4 Return to the shooting screen and shoot. ●● Press the [ ] button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot. 51 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips) Speed Playback Time Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) Still Images Approx. 12 sec. Approx. 6 sec. Approx. 3 sec. Basic Guide Advanced Guide This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color. 1 Choose [ Movies are played back at 30 fps. Camera Basics ]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. ●● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the zoom before shooting. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. ●● To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical, press the [ ][ ] buttons in step 2. To return the frame to horizontal orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons, and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame. ] and [ ] at ●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] (= 40). These quality settings cannot an aspect ratio of [ be changed. Movies Before Use Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a color tone. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a color tone, and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 3 Shoot. Standard Shots resemble toy camera images. Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]. Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 52 Shooting in Monochrome Still Images ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose a color tone. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a color tone, and then press the [ ] button. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. B/W Sepia Blue Black and white shots. Sepia tone shots. Blue and white shots. Basic Guide Movies Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white. 1 Choose [ Before Use Special Modes for Other Purposes Advanced Guide Auto Shooting after Face Detection (Smart Shutter) Still Images Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Auto Shooting after Smile Detection Other Shooting Modes The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile, even without you pressing the shutter button. 1 Choose [ P Mode ]. Playback Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ], Accessories ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Smile Detection on] is displayed. 2 Aim the camera at a person. Appendix Index ●● Each time the camera detects a smile, it will shoot after the lamp lights up. ●● To pause smile detection, press the [ ] button. Press the [ ] button again to resume detection. ●● Switch to another mode when you finish shooting, or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected. 53 4 Face the camera and wink. ●● You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button. ●● The camera can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 43) is only available for the final shot. Movies Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down. The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ and then press the [ ] button. 2 ], Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. ●● Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face of the person who will wink. 3 Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Wink to take picture] is displayed. ●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ Auto Shooting after Wink Detection (Wink Self-Timer) Still Images Before Use ●● The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting a wink by the person whose face is inside the frame. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● If the wink is not detected, wink again slowly and deliberately. ●● Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair, a hat, or glasses. ●● Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink. ●● If winking is not detected, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 43) is only available for the final shot. ●● If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Auto Shooting after Detecting New Person (Face SelfTimer) Still Images Movies Appendix Index The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area (= 63). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ and then press the [ ] button. ], 54 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. ●● Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face you focus on and white frames around other faces. 3 Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed. Before Use Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter) Still Images Movies Specify a shutter speed of 1 – 15 seconds to shoot long exposures. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to prevent camera shake. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Choose [ ]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. Other Shooting Modes ●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. 4 Join the subjects in the shooting area and look at the camera. ●● After the camera detects a new face, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will shoot. ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ ●● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, press the [ ][ ] buttons after choosing [ ] in step 1. [Blink Detection] (= 43) is only available for the final shot. P Mode 2 Choose the shutter speed. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired shutter speed (= 26). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 3 Check the exposure. Accessories ●● Press the shutter button halfway to view the exposure for your selected shutter speed. 4 Shoot. Appendix Index ●● On-screen image brightness in step 3, when you pressed the shutter button halfway, may not match the brightness of your shots. ●● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes images to reduce noise. ●● Set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 44). 55 ●● If the flash fires, your shot may be overexposed. In this case, set the flash to [ ] and shoot again (= 66). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide High-Speed Continuous Shooting (High-Speed Burst) Still Images Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies Other Shooting Modes You can shoot a series of shots in rapid succession by holding the shutter button all the way down. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 158). 1 Choose [ P Mode ]. Playback Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Shoot. Accessories ●● Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● The recording pixel setting is [ ] (2592 x 1944) and cannot be changed. ●● Focus, image brightness, and color are determined by the first shot. ●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. Appendix Index 56 Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) Still Images Movies You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style. 1 Enter [ P Mode Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ] mode. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Specific Scenes” (= 49) and choose [ ]. More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style Other Shooting Modes 2 Customize the settings as desired (= 58 – = 68), and then shoot. ●● Instructions in this chapter apply when the mode switch set to [ mode to [ ]. ] and ●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure ●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode (= 148). P Mode Playback Mode ●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed (= 59) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 66), which may enable adequate exposure. ●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the movie button. However, some FUNC. (= 26) and MENU (= 27) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 57 Before Use Changing the Metering Method Image Brightness (Exposure) Still Images Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting conditions as follows. Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) Still Images Movies Movies ●● The correction level you specified is now displayed. Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 2 6). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● The option you configured is now displayed. The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-stop increments, in a range of –2 to +2. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [ ] in the menu. As you watch the screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust brightness (= 26). Basic Guide Other Shooting Modes P Mode Evaluative Center Weighted Avg. Spot For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions. Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more important. Playback Mode Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen. Accessories Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Appendix Index 58 Changing the ISO Speed Still Images Movies ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. AUTO 80, 100, 200 400, 800 1600, 3200 Before Use Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions. For shooting outdoors in fair weather. For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight. For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms. Still Images Movies Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Auto] (= 27). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ] is P Mode Playback Mode ●● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. Wi-Fi Functions Higher ISO speeds give higher sensitivity, and lower speeds give lower sensitivity. Setting Menu ●● You can also correct existing images (= 86). ●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway. ●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera shake in some shooting conditions. ●● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy. Accessories Appendix Index 59 Custom White Balance Image Colors Before Use Still Images Movies For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot. Adjusting White Balance Still Images Movies By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (= 60) to choose [ ]. Camera Basics ●● Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that the entire screen is white. Press ] button. the [ Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● The tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded. P Mode ●● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting conditions. Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather. Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight. Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting. Fluorescent For shooting under white fluorescent lighting. Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). Custom For manually setting a custom white balance (= 60). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Setting Menu Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Accessories Movies Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or black and white. Appendix Index 60 – My Colors Off Vivid Neutral Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images sharper. Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images. Sepia Creates sepia tone images. B/W Creates black and white images. Positive Film Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling images on positive film. Lighter Skin Tone Darker Skin Tone Vivid Blue Vivid Green Vivid Red Custom Color Lightens skin tones. Darkens skin tones. Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid. Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and other green subjects more vivid. Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid. Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other qualities as desired (= 61). Custom Color Before Use Still Images Movies Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5. Advanced Guide 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 60) to choose [ ], and then press the [ button. Basic Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] Other Shooting Modes 2 Configure the setting. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item, and then specify the value by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● For stronger/more intense effects (or darker skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and for weaker/lighter effects (or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to the left. ●● Press the [ the setting. Setting Menu Accessories ] button to complete Appendix Index ●● White balance (= 60) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes. ●● With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may change. These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones. 61 To restrict the focus to distant subjects, set the camera to [ on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (= 158). Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) Still Images Before Use Shooting Distant Subjects (Infinity) Shooting Range and Focusing Movies To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For details on the range of focus, see “Shooting Range” (= 158). ]. For details ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] is ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur. ●● When the zoom position is within the range of the yellow bar below the zoom bar, [ ] turns gray and the camera cannot focus. ●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 38). Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 62 Digital Tele-Converter Before Use Changing the AF Frame Mode Still Images Movies The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or 2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor. Still Images Movies Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as follows. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 27). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 27). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor is displayed on the screen. P Mode Face AiAF ●● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom (= 36) or AF-point zoom (= 43). ●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom ] for maximum telephoto, and when lever all the way toward [ you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 36). Playback Mode Still Images Movies Wi-Fi Functions ●● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative metering only), and white balance ([ ] only). Setting Menu ●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. ●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range. Accessories Appendix Index ●● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus. 63 ●● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed (without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 65) is set to [On], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected: -- Subjects that are distant or extremely close -- Subjects that are dark or light -- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden ●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces. ●● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the desired subject, and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● When the subject is detected, the camera beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the subject moves, the camera will continue to track the subject within a certain range. ●● If no subject is detected, [ Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ] is displayed. P Mode ●● To cancel tracking, press the [ ] button again. Playback Mode 3 Shoot. Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) Still Images 2 Choose a subject to focus on. Movies Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows. 1 Choose [Tracking AF]. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing the AF Frame Mode” (= 63) to choose [Tracking AF]. ●● [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ] changes to a blue [ ], which follows the subject as the camera continues to adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF) (= 65). Setting Menu Accessories ●● Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. ●● Even after your shot, [ ] is still displayed and the camera continues to track the subject. Appendix Index ●● [Servo AF] (= 65) is set to [On] and cannot be changed. ●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab is not available. ●● [ ] and [ ] are not available. 64 ●● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway without pressing the [ ] button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen. Center Still Images Movies One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing. ●● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set [AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab to [Small] (= 27). ●● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital zoom (= 36) or digital tele-converter (= 63). ●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down (Focus Lock). ●● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway with [AF-Point Zoom] (= 43) set to [On]. Shooting with Servo AF Before Use Still Images Movies This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ AF] on the [ (= 27). Camera Basics ] button, choose [Servo ] tab, and then choose [On] Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Focus. P Mode ●● The focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions. ●● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode. ●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, the shutter speed and aperture value are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 27) is not available. ●● Not available when using the self-timer (= 37). Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 65 Changing the Focus Setting Before Use Flash Still Images Basic Guide Movies You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 27). Advanced Guide Changing the Flash Mode Still Images Camera Basics Movies You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 158). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Raise the flash. Other Shooting Modes ●● Move the [ ] switch. P Mode 2 Configure the setting. On Off Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway. Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a flash mode, and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Setting Menu Accessories ●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button when the flash is lowered. Move the [ ] switch to raise the flash, then configure the setting. Appendix Index 66 Auto Fires automatically in low-light conditions. Before Use Other Settings Basic Guide On Fires for each shot. Slow Synchro Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 44). ●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing. Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) Still Images Advanced Guide Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 157). Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Off Setting Menu For shooting without the flash. ●● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Accessories Appendix Index 67 Before Use Changing the IS Mode Settings Still Images Movies ●● Choose [Shoot Only] in steps 1 – 2 of “Deactivating Image Stabilization” (= 44). Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]. ●● The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 68 Before Use Viewing Still Images Movies After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Enter Playback mode. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways ●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the [ enter Playback mode. Basic Guide ] button to ●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] button. ●● Your last shot is displayed. Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose an image. P Mode ●● To view the previous image, press the [ ] button. To view the next image, press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix ●● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode), press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons for at least one second. In this mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images. Index ●● To return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. ●● To browse images grouped by shooting date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll Display mode. 69 ●● Movies are identified by a [ To play movies, go to step 3. 3 ] icon. Play movies. ●● To start playback, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. ] tab ●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 27) > [ > [Scroll Display] > [Off]. ●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback ] tab > [Resume] > [Last mode, choose MENU (= 27) > [ shot]. ●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU ] tab > (= 27) and choose your desired effect on the [ [Transition]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Switching Display Modes 4 Adjust the volume. ●● Press the [ volume. ][ P Mode Still Images ] buttons to adjust the ●● To adjust the volume when the volume indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. Playback Mode Movies Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (= 147). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories No Information Display (1) Appendix 5 Pause playback. ●● To pause or resume playback, press the [ ] button. ●● After the movie is finished, [ displayed. Simple Information Display Index ] is Detailed Information Display 70 Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) Still Images Movies ●● UTC: Coordinated Universal Time, essentially the same as Greenwich Mean Time Movies Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies) Before Use Basic Guide Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display (= 70). Histogram Still Images ●● The graph in detailed information display (= 70) is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at each level of brightness. Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure. Still Images View digest movies recorded automatically in [ day of still image shooting. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies ] mode (= 32) on a Other Shooting Modes 1 Choose an image. P Mode ●● Still images shot in [ ] mode are labeled with [ ] icon. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions GPS Information Display Still Images Movies ●● Using a smartphone connected to the camera via Wi-Fi, you can geotag images on the camera, adding information such as latitude, longitude, and elevation (= 114). You can review this information in the GPS information display. ●● Latitude, longitude, elevation, and UTC (shooting date and time) are listed from top to bottom. ●● GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information. ●● [---] is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly. Setting Menu 2 Play the digest movie. Accessories ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). ●● The digest movie created on the day of still image shooting is played back, from the beginning. Appendix Index ●● After a moment, [ ] will no longer be displayed when you are using the camera with information display deactivated (= 70). 71 Viewing by Date 1 Choose a movie. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [List/ Play Digest Movies] on the [ ] tab, and then choose a date (= 27). 2 Play the movie. ●● Press the [ Before Use Browsing and Filtering Images Digest movies can be viewed by date. ] button to start playback. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Navigating through Images in an Index Still Images Camera Basics Movies By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you are looking for. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Display images in an index. Other Shooting Modes ●● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to display images in an index. Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown. P Mode Playback Mode ●● To display fewer images, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ an image. ][ Accessories ][ ][ ] buttons to choose ●● An orange frame is displayed around the selected image. ●● Press the [ ] button to view the selected image in single-image display. Appendix Index 72 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions Still Images Movies Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect (= 77) or delete (= 79) these images all at once. People Displays images with detected faces. Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specific date. Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (= 83). Still Image/ Movie Displays still images, movies, or movies shot in [ ] mode (= 32). ●● To hide or view other information, press the [ ] button in step 2. ●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 72), “Magnifying Images” (= 75), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 75). You can protect, erase, or print all images found or add them to a photobook by choosing [Select All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 77), “Erasing All Images” (= 80), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 137), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 139). ●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 84 – = 88), a message is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 1 Choose a search condition. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose a condition (= 26). Wi-Fi Functions ●● When you have selected [ ] or [ ], choose the condition by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen displayed, and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu Accessories 2 View the filtered images. Appendix ●● Images matching your conditions are displayed in yellow frames. To view only these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● To cancel filtered display, choose [ step 1. Index ] in ●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some conditions, those conditions will not be available. 73 Viewing Individual Images in a Group Still Images Movies Images shot in [ ] or [ ] mode (= 47, = 56) are grouped, and only the first image is displayed. However, you can also view the images individually. 1 Choose a grouped image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image labeled with [ ]. 2 Choose [ ]. ●● During group playback (step 3), you can use the menu functions accessed by pressing the [ ] button. You can also browse through images quickly “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 72) and magnify them “Magnifying Images” (= 75). By choosing [All Images in Group] for “Protecting Images” (= 77), “Erasing All Images” (= 80), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 137), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 139), all images in the group can be manipulated at once. ●● To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still ] tab > [Group Images] > images, choose MENU (= 27) > [ [Off] (= 27). However, grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback. ] mode, the simultaneous display after step 2 in “Enjoying ●● In [ a Variety of Images from Each Shot (Creative Shot)” (= 47) is only shown immediately after you shoot. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories 3 View images in the group Appendix individually. ●● Pressing the [ ][ ] buttons will display only images in the group. ●● To cancel group playback, press the [ button, choose [ ] in the menu, and press the [ ] button again (= 26). Index ] 74 Before Use Viewing Slideshows Image Viewing Options Still Images Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each image is displayed for about three seconds. Magnifying Images Still Images Movies 1 Magnify an image. ●● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will zoom in and magnify the image, and [ ] is displayed. You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever. ●● The approximate position of the displayed area (1) is shown for reference. ●● To zoom out, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. You can return to singleimage display by continuing to hold it. (1) Movies 2 Move the display position and switch images as needed. ●● To move the display position, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 26). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● The slideshow will start after [Loading image] is displayed for a few seconds. ●● Press the [ slideshow. Other Shooting Modes ] button to stop the P Mode ●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 25) are deactivated during slideshows. Playback Mode ●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button. ●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down. ●● In filtered display (= 73), only images matching search conditions are played. Setting Menu Wi-Fi Functions Accessories Appendix Index ] is displayed, you can ●● While [ switch to [ ] by pressing the [ ] button. To switch to other images while zoomed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. Press the [ ] button again to restore the original setting. ●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by ] button. pressing the [ 75 Changing Slideshow Settings You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions between images and the display duration of each image. 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab (= 27). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Choose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 27). ●● To start the slideshow with your settings, choose [Start] and press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ ●● [Play Time] cannot be modified when [Bubble] is chosen in [Effect]. Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle) Still Images Movies Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 1 Choose Smart Shuffle. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). P Mode ●● Four candidate images are displayed. Playback Mode 2 Choose an image. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the image you want to view next. Setting Menu ●● Your chosen image is displayed in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate images. ●● For full-screen display of the center image, press the [ ] button. To restore the original display, press the [ ] button again. Accessories Appendix Index ] button to restore ●● Press the [ single-image display. ●● Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases: -- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera -- An unsupported image is currently displayed -- Images are shown in filtered display (= 73) -- During group playback (= 74) 76 Before Use Using the Menu Protecting Images Still Images Movies Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure (= 79). ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). [Protected] is displayed. ●● To cancel protection, repeat this process ] again, and then press and choose [ the [ ] button. ●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the card (= 121, = 122). Basic Guide 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Protect] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Choose a menu item and an option as desired (= 27). P Mode ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 77 Choosing Images Individually Before Use Selecting a Range Basic Guide 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 77), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 77), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose a starting image. ●● Press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● To cancel protection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. 3 Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Protect the image. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories 3 Choose an ending image. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last image], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images before the first image cannot be selected as the last image. 78 4 Protect the images. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Erasing Images Still Images Movies You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 77) cannot be erased. ●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4. Protecting All Images at Once 1 Choose [Protect All Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 77), choose [Protect All Images] and press the [ ] button. 2 Protect the images. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Choose an image to erase. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. Other Shooting Modes 2 Erase the image. P Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). Playback Mode ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions ●● The current image is now erased. Setting Menu ●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Index Clearing All Protection at Once You can clear protection from all images at once. To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2. 79 Choosing Images Individually Erasing All Images You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 77) cannot be erased. Choosing a Selection Method 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (= 27). 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Choose a menu item and an option as desired (= 27). ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 80), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Choose an image. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Once you choose an image following step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually” (= 78), [ ] is displayed. Other Shooting Modes ●● To untag the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. P Mode ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. Playback Mode 3 Erase the image. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index 80 Selecting a Range 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 80), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose images. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 78) to specify images. Before Use Rotating Images Still Images Movies Change the orientation of images and save them as follows. 1 Choose [ Basic Guide Advanced Guide ]. Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 3 Erase the images. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. Specifying All Images at Once P Mode 2 Rotate the image. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending on the desired direction. Each time you press the button, the image is rotated 90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the setting. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories 1 Choose [Select All Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 80), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. Appendix Index 2 Erase the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 81 Using the Menu Before Use Deactivating Auto Rotation 1 Choose [Rotate]. ●● Press the [ [Rotate] on the [ ] button and choose ] tab (= 27). Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates images based on the current camera orientation. ●● Press the [ Rotate] on the [ [Off] (= 27). ] button, choose [Auto ] tab, and then choose Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Rotate the image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. ●● The image is rotated 90° each time you press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu screen, press the ] button. [ P Mode ●● Images cannot be rotated (= 81) when you set [Auto Rotate] to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation. ●● In Smart Shuffle (= 76) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (= 82). Accessories Appendix Index 82 2 Choose an image. Tagging Images as Favorites Still Images Movies You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all of those images. ●● “Viewing” (= 69), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 75), “Protecting Images” (= 77), “Erasing Images” (= 79), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 137), “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 139) ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 26). ●● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● To cancel protection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Repeat this process to choose additional images. 3 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Configure the setting. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● To cancel protection, repeat this process and choose [ ] again, and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. Using the Menu Setting Menu Accessories 1 Choose [Favorites]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Favorites] on the [ ] tab (= 27). ●● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7. (Does not apply to movies.) Appendix Index 83 4 Save the new image. Editing Still Images Before Use ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The image is now saved as a new file. ●● Image editing (= 84 – = 86) is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 5 Review the new image. Resizing Images Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button. [Display new image?] is displayed. Still Images Movies Save a copy of images at a lower number of recording pixels. P Mode ●● The saved image is now displayed. 1 Choose [Resize]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Resize] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting of [ ] (= 41). Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an image size. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the size, and then press the [ ] button. ●● [Save new image?] is displayed. ●● Images cannot be resized to a higher number of recording pixels. Accessories Appendix Cropping Still Images Movies Index You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file. 1 Choose [Cropping]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab (= 27). 84 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. (1) (2) (3) 3 Adjust the cropping area. ●● A frame is displayed around the portion of the image to be cropped (1). ●● The original image is shown in the upper left, and a preview of the image as cropped (2) is shown in the lower right. You can also see the number of recording pixels after cropping (3). ●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. ●● To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. ●● To change the frame orientation, press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ] button. 4 Save as a new image and review. Before Use Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Movies You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 60). 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Choose [My Colors]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Choose an image. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions 3 Choose an option. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 84). ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a recording pixel setting of [ ] (= 41) or resized to [ ] (= 84). ●● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping. ●● Cropped images will have a lower number of recording pixels than uncropped images. Appendix 4 Save as a new image and review. Index ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 84). ●● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color. ●● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors (= 60). 85 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Before Use ●● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using [Low], [Medium], or [High]. Basic Guide Movies Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a separate file. 1 Choose [i-Contrast]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Advanced Guide Correcting Red-Eye Still Images Camera Basics Movies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the corrected image as a separate file. Other Shooting Modes 1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ tab (= 27). P Mode ] Playback Mode 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 84). Wi-Fi Functions 2 Choose an image. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. Accessories 3 Correct the image. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Red-eye detected by the camera is now corrected, and frames are displayed around corrected image areas. Appendix Index ●● Enlarge or reduce images as needed. Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images” (= 75). ●● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. ●● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function. 86 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● The image is now saved as a new file. ●● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 84). Before Use Editing Movies ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. Still Images Movies Advanced Guide You can remove unneeded portions from the beginning and end of movies. 1 Choose [ Camera Basics ]. ●● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing” (= 69), choose [ ] and press the [ button. ●● Some images may not be corrected accurately. ●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased. ●● Protected images cannot be overwritten. Basic Guide Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] Other Shooting Modes ●● The movie editing panel and editing bar are now displayed. P Mode Playback Mode 2 Specify portions to cut. (1) ●● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is the editing bar. ●● Press the [ or [ ]. (2) ][ ] buttons to choose [ Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ] ●● To view the portions you can cut (identified by [ ] on the screen), press the [ ][ ] buttons to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of the movie by choosing [ ]. Accessories Appendix Index ●● If you move [ ] to a position other than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be cut. 87 3 Review the edited movie. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. The edited movie is now played. ●● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. ●● To cancel editing, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ]. Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button again. Before Use Editing Digest Movies Still Images Movies Individual chapters (clips) (= 32) recorded in [ ] mode can be erased, as needed. Be careful when erasing clips, because they cannot be recovered. 1 ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The movie is now saved as a new file. ●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased. ●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be available. ●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress. ●● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 126). Advanced Guide Camera Basics Select the clip to erase. ●● Follow steps 1 – 2 in “Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images (Digest Movies)” (= 71) to play a movie created in [ ] mode, and then press the [ ] button to access the movie control panel. 4 Save the edited movie. Basic Guide 2 Choose [ Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode ] or Wi-Fi Functions ]. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● The selected clip is played back repeatedly. 3 Confirm erasure. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● The clip is erased, and the short movie is overwritten. ●● [ ] is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a printer. 88 Available Wi-Fi Features You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by connecting it to these devices and services via Wi-Fi. Wi-Fi Functions Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices, and use the camera with Web services ●● Before using Wi-Fi, be sure to read “Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions” (= 161). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Smartphones and Tablets Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi-Fi functions. You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a smartphone or tablet. For convenience in this manual, smartphones, tablets, and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as “smartphones”. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Computer Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via Wi-Fi. P Mode ●● Web Services Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send camera images to the services. Unsent images on the camera can also be sent to a computer or Web service via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Printers Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge-compatible printer (supporting DPS over IP) to print them. ●● Another Camera Send images wirelessly between Wi-Fi compatible Canon cameras. Accessories Appendix Index 89 Sending Images to a Smartphone There are several ways to connect the camera to a smartphone and send images. ●● Connect via NFC (= 90) Simply touch an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later) against the camera to connect the devices. ●● Connect to a device assigned to the [ ] button (= 93) Simply press the [ ] button to connect the devices. This simplifies sending images to a smartphone (= 93). Note that only one smartphone can be assigned to the [ ] button. ●● Connect via the Wi-Fi menu (= 94) You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it to a computer or other device. Multiple smartphones can be added. Before connecting to the camera, you must install the free dedicated Camera Connect app on the smartphone. For details on this application (supported smartphones and included functions), refer to the Canon website. ●● If you have a Wi-Fi compatible Canon camera, and connect the camera and a smartphone over a Wi-Fi connection, we recommend changing your smartphone application from CameraWindow to Camera Connect. Sending Images to an NFC-Compatible Smartphone Before Use Using an NFC-compatible Android smartphone (OS version 4.0 or later) simplifies the process of installing Camera Connect and connecting the devices via NFC. Operation once the devices are connected via NFC varies depending on the camera mode when the devices are touched together. Advanced Guide Basic Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● If the camera is off or in Shooting mode when the devices are touched together, you can choose and send images on the image selection screen. Once the devices are connected, you can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots (= 114). It’s easy to reconnect to recent devices, which are listed in the Wi-Fi menu. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● If the camera is in playback mode when the devices are touched together a screen showing a list of images to be sent is displayed, so you can choose and send images. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Follow the instructions in the following section for NFC-initiated connection to a camera that is off or in Shooting mode. Setting Menu Accessories Connecting via NFC When Camera Is Off or in Shooting Mode 1 Install Camera Connect. Appendix Index ●● Activate NFC on the smartphone and touch the devices N-Mark ( ) together to start Google Play on the smartphone automatically. Once the Camera Connect download page is displayed, download and install the app. 90 2 Establish the connection. ●● Make sure the camera is off or in Shooting mode. ●● Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone with Camera Connect installed against the camera’s N-Mark. ●● The camera starts up automatically. ●● After [Device Nickname] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Camera Connect is started on the smartphone. ●● The camera and smartphone are connected automatically. 3 Adjust the privacy setting. ●● After this screen is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can now use the smartphone to browse, import, or geotag images on the camera or shoot remotely. 4 Send an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, press the [ ] button to mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Playback Mode ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. Wi-Fi Functions ●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. ●● To end the connection, press the ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons [ on the confirmation screen to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. You can also use the smartphone to end the connection. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 91 ●● When using NFC, keep the following points in mind. -- Avoid strong impact between the camera and smartphone. This may damage the devices. -- Depending on the smartphone, the devices may not recognize each other immediately. In this case, try holding the devices together in slightly different positions. If connection is not established, keep the devices together until the camera screen is updated. -- If you try to connect while the camera is turned off, a message may be displayed on the smartphone screen asking for the camera to be turned on. Turn the camera on again, and then touch the devices together again. -- Do not place other objects between the camera and smartphone. Also, note that camera or smartphone covers or similar accessories may block communication. ●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 3. To keep camera images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 3. ●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera (= 116). ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in step 2 (= 91). ●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 109). ●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on the screen in step 4. ●● To disable NFC connections, choose MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [NFC] > [Off]. Connecting via NFC When Camera Is in Playback Mode ●● Press the [ on. ] button to turn the camera ●● Touch the N-Mark ( ) on the smartphone with Camera Connect installed (= 90) against the camera’s N-Mark. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. Other Shooting Modes ●● To cancel selection, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. P Mode ●● Repeat this process to choose additional images. Playback Mode ●● After you finish choosing images, press ] button. the [ Wi-Fi Functions ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Menu ●● The image is sent. The connection is ended automatically after the image is sent. Accessories Appendix ●● If during connection a message on the camera requests you to enter the nickname, follow step 2 in “Sending Images to an NFCCompatible Smartphone” (= 90) to enter it. ●● The camera does not keep a record of smartphones you connect to via NFC in Playback mode. ●● You can preset images to transfer at your desired size (= 109). Index 92 Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the [ ] button, you can simply press the [ ] button after that to connect again for viewing and saving camera images on your connected device. These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 96). 1 Install Camera Connect. 3 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● The camera’s SSID is displayed. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find Camera Connect in the App Store and download and install the app. ●● For Android smartphones, find Camera Connect in Google Play and download and install the app. 2 Press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● After [Device Nickname] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode 4 Connect the smartphone to the Playback Mode network. Wi-Fi Functions ●● In the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera to establish a connection. Setting Menu Accessories 5 Start Camera Connect. ●● Start Camera Connect on the smartphone. ●● After the camera recognizes the smartphone, a device selection screen is displayed. Appendix Index 93 6 Choose the smartphone to connect to. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the smartphone, and then press the [ ] button. ●● After a connection is established with the smartphone, the smartphone name is displayed on the camera. (This screen will close in about one minute.) 7 Import images. ●● Use the smartphone to import images from the camera to the smartphone. ●● Use the smartphone to end the connection; the camera will automatically turn off. ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in step 2 (= 93). ●● For better security, you can display a password on the screen in step 3 by accessing MENU (= 27) and choosing [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Password] > [On]. In this case, in the password field on the smartphone in step 4, enter the password displayed on the camera. ●● One smartphone can be registered to the [ ] button. To assign a different one, first clear the current one in MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Mobile Device Connect Button]. ●● Not all NFC-compatible smartphones have an N-Mark ( ). For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 96). 1 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Install Camera Connect. Camera Basics ●● For an iPhone, iPad, or iPod touch, find Camera Connect in the App Store and download and install the app. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● For Android smartphones, find Camera Connect in Google Play and download and install the app. Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ Playback Mode ] button to turn the camera Wi-Fi Functions ] button. ●● If the [Device Nickname] screen is displayed, choose [OK] (= 93). 3 Choose [ Setting Menu Accessories ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index 94 4 Choose [Add a Device]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. 6 Send an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The camera’s SSID is displayed. ●● Choose the smartphone to connect to, as described in steps 4 – 6 of “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 93). 5 Adjust the privacy setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can now use the smartphone to browse, import, or geotag images on the camera or shoot remotely. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, press the [ ] button to mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Playback Mode ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. Wi-Fi Functions ●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. ●● To end the connection, press the ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons [ on the confirmation screen to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. You can also use the smartphone to end the connection. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● To add multiple smartphones, repeat the above procedure starting from step 1. ●● All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose [Yes] in step 5. To keep camera images private, so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone, choose [No] in step 5. ●● Once you have registered a smartphone, you can change privacy settings for it on the camera (= 116). 95 ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off]. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 109). ●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on the screen in step 6. Before Use Using Another Access Point Basic Guide When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the [ ] button or through the Wi-Fi menu, you can also use an existing access point. 1 Advanced Guide Prepare for the connection. Camera Basics ●● Access the [Waiting to connect] screen by either following steps 1 – 3 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 93) or steps 1 – 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 94). Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Connect the smartphone to the access point. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions 3 Choose [Switch Network]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Switch Network], and then press the [ button. ●● A list of detected access points will be displayed. Setting Menu Accessories ] Appendix Index 96 4 Connect to the access point and choose the smartphone. ●● For WPS-compatible access points, connect to the access point and choose the smartphone as described in steps 5 – 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99). ●● For non-WPS access points, follow steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 101) to connect to the access point and choose the smartphone. 5 Configure the privacy settings and send images. ●● Follow steps 5 – 6 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 94) to configure the privacy settings and send images. Previous Access Points To reconnect to a previous access point automatically, follow step 3 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 93) or step 4 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 94). ●● To use the camera as an access point, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then choose [Camera Access Point Mode]. ●● To reconnect to a previous access point, follow the procedure from step 5 in “Using Another Access Point” (= 96). ●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then follow the procedure in “Using Another Access Point” (= 96) from step 4. Saving Images to a Computer Preparing to Register a Computer Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Checking Your Computer Environment Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode The camera can connect via Wi-Fi to computers running the following operating systems. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Windows 8/8.1 ●● Windows 7 SP1 Playback Mode ●● Mac OS X 10.9 Wi-Fi Functions ●● Mac OS X 10.8.2 or later Setting Menu ●● Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported. ●● Windows 7 N (European version) and KN (South Korean version) require a separate download and installation of Windows Media Feature Pack. For details, check the following website. http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730 Accessories Appendix Index Installing the Software Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration. 1 Download the software. ●● With a computer connected to the Internet, access http://www.canon.com/ icpd/. ●● Access the site for your country or region. ●● Download the software. 97 2 Install the files. ●● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. ●● Installation may take some time, depending on computer performance and the Internet connection. ●● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen after installation. ●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately. ●● Follow the steps below to uninstall (delete) the software. -- In Windows, click in the following order: [Start] menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the software you want to uninstall. -- In Mac OS, click on [Applications] folder, choose the [Canon Utilities] folder, and then drag the folder of the software you want to uninstall to the trash. Configuring the Computer for a Wi-Fi Connection (Windows Only) 2 Configure the setting. ●● Click in the following order: [Start] menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities] > [CameraWindow] > [Wi-Fi connection setup]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● In the application that opens, follow the on-screen instructions and configure the setting. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in step 2. -- Turn on media streaming. This will enable the camera to see (find) the computer to access via Wi-Fi. -- Turn on network discovery. This will enable the computer to see (find) the camera. -- Turn on ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol). This allows you to check the network connection status. -- Enable Universal Plug & Play (UPnP). This will enable network devices to detect each other automatically. ●● Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as described here. Check the settings of your security software. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index On a computer running Windows, configure the following settings before connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly. 1 Confirm that the computer is connected to an access point. ●● For instructions on checking your network connection, refer to the computer user manual. 98 Saving Images to a Connected Computer Connect to your access point via Wi-Fi as follows. Also refer to the access point user manual. Confirming Access Point Compatibility Confirm that the Wi-Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi-Fi standards (“Wi-Fi” (= 156)). Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS, = 99) or not (= 101). For non-WPS access points, check the following information. ●● Network name (SSID/ESSID) The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use. Also called the “access point name” or “network name”. ●● Network authentication / data encryption (encryption method / encryption mode) The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission. Check which security setting is used: WPA2-PSK (AES), WPA2-PSK (TKIP), WPA-PSK (AES), WPA-PSK (TKIP), WEP (open system authentication), or no security. ●● Password (encryption key / network key) The key used when encrypting data during wireless transmission. Also called the “encryption key” or “network key”. ●● Key index (transmit key) The key set when WEP is used for network authentication / data encryption. Use “1” as the setting. ●● If system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings, contact the system administrator for details. ●● These settings are very important for network security. Exercise adequate caution when changing these settings. ●● For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on checking settings, refer to the access point user manual. ●● A router is a device that creates a network (LAN) structure for connecting multiple computers. A router that contains an internal Wi-Fi function is called a “Wi-Fi router”. ●● This guide refers to all Wi-Fi routers and base stations as “access points”. ●● If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi-Fi network, be sure to add the camera’s MAC address to your access point. You can check your camera’s MAC address by choosing MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Check MAC Address]. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Using WPS-Compatible Access Points Playback Mode WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Wi-Fi. You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for settings on a WPS supported device. Wi-Fi Functions 1 Confirm that the computer is Setting Menu connected to an access point. Accessories ●● For instructions on checking the connection, refer to the device and access point user manuals. 2 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ Appendix Index ] button to turn the camera ] button. 99 ●● After [Device Nickname] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 7 Establish the connection. ●● On the access point, hold down the WPS connection button for a few seconds. ●● On the camera, press the [ go to the next step. 3 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose [Add a Device]. ] button to Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● The camera connects to the access point and lists devices connected to it on the [Select a Device] screen. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 8 Choose the target device. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the target device name, and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 9 Install a driver (first Windows connection only). 5 Choose [WPS Connection]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [WPS Connection], and then press the [ ] button. 6 Choose [PBC Method]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [PBC Method], and then press the [ ] button. ●● When this screen is displayed on the camera, click the Start menu on the computer, click [Control Panel], and then click [Add a device]. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Double-click the connected camera icon. ●● Driver installation will begin. ●● After driver installation is complete, and the camera and computer connection is enabled, the AutoPlay screen will be displayed. Nothing will be displayed on the camera screen. 100 10 Display CameraWindow. ●● Windows: Access CameraWindow by clicking [Downloads Images From Canon Camera]. ●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is automatically displayed when a Wi-Fi connection is established between the camera and computer. 11 Import images. ●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. ●● Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. ●● Click [OK] in the screen that is displayed after image import is complete. ●● When viewing imported images on a computer, always use software that supports the images shot on the camera (software normally installed on the computer or general-use software). ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off]. ●● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in step 2 (= 100). ●● When the camera is connected to a computer, the camera screen is blank. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● To disconnect from the camera, turn off the camera. ●● If you chose [PIN Method] in step 6, a PIN code will be displayed on the screen. Be sure to set this code in the access point. Choose a device in the [Select a Device] screen. For further details, refer to the user manual included with your access point. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Connecting to Listed Access Points Accessories Appendix 1 View the listed access points. ●● View the listed networks (access points) as described in steps 1 – 4 of “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99). Index 2 Choose an access point. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a network (access point), and then press the [ ] button. 101 3 Enter the access point password. ●● Press the [ ] button to access the keyboard, and then enter the password (= 28). ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Next], and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose [Auto]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Auto], and then press the [ ] button. ●● To save images to a connected computer, follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99). ●● To determine the access point password, check on the access point itself or refer to the user manual. ●● Up to 16 access points will be displayed. If no access points are detected even after you choose [Refresh] in step 2 to update the list, choose [Manual Settings] in step 2 to complete access point settings manually. Follow on-screen instructions and enter an SSID, security settings, and a password. ●● When you use an access point that you have already connected to for connecting to another device, [*] is displayed for the password in step 3. To use the same password, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Next], and then press the [ ] button. Previous Access Points You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following step 4 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99). ●● To connect to a device via an access point, confirm that the target device is already connected to the access point, and then follow the procedure from step 8 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● To switch access points, choose [Switch Network] on the screen displayed when you establish a connection, and then either follow the procedure in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99) from step 5 or the procedure in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 101) from step 2. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 102 Sending Images to a Registered Web Service Registering Web Services Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you want to use. ●● A smartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is required to complete camera settings for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and other Web services. ●● Check the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer, etc.) requirements, including settings and version information. ●● For information on countries and regions where CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is available, visit the Canon website (http://www.canon. com/cig/). ●● You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them. For further details, check the websites for each Web service you want to register. ●● Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable. Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY ●● Once the login screen is displayed, enter your user name and password to log in. If you do not have a CANON iMAGE GATEWAY account, follow the instructions to complete member registration (free of charge). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 2 Choose the type of camera. ●● On this camera model, [ in the Wi-Fi menu. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] is displayed ], a page is ●● Once you choose [ displayed for entering the authentication code. On this page in step 7, you will enter the authentication code displayed on the camera after steps 3 – 6. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode 3 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ Wi-Fi Functions ] button to turn the camera Setting Menu ] button. Accessories ●● After [Device Nickname] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index After linking the camera and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, add CANON iMAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera. 1 Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and access the camera link settings page. ●● From a computer or smartphone, access http://www.canon.com/cig/ to visit CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. 103 4 Choose [ 8 Check the confirmation number and ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● On screen 2 of step 6, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. The confirmation number is displayed. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Make sure the confirmation number on the camera matches the number on the smartphone or computer. 5 Choose [Authenticate]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Authenticate], and then press the [ button. complete the setup process. ] Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes ●● Complete the setup process on the smartphone or computer. P Mode 6 Establish a connection with an Playback Mode access point. ●● Connect to the access point as described in steps 5 – 7 in “Using WPS-Compatible Access Points” (= 99) or in steps 2 – 4 in “Connecting to Listed Access Points” (= 101). ●● Once the camera is connected to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point, an authentication code is displayed. ●● Keep this screen displayed until step 7 is complete. 7 Enter the authentication code. ●● On the smartphone or computer, enter the authentication code displayed on the camera and go to the next step. ●● A six-digit confirmation number is displayed. Wi-Fi Functions ●● [ ] (= 112) and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY are now added as destinations, and the [ ] icon changes to [ ]. ●● A message is displayed on the smartphone or computer to indicate that this process is finished. To add other Web services, follow the procedure in “Registering Other Web Services” (= 105) from step 2. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● You can change the camera nickname displayed on the screen in step 3 (= 103). ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the menu. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen and then configure the setting. 104 Registering Other Web Services You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera. Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the camera first (= 103). 1 Access the Web service settings screen. ●● Follow step 1 in “Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 103) to log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, and then access the Web service settings screen. 2 Configure the Web service you want to use. ●● Follow the instructions displayed on the smartphone or computer to set up the Web service. 3 Choose [ ]. ●● In Playback mode, press the [ to access the Wi-Fi menu. ] button Uploading Images to Web Services Basic Guide 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ Advanced Guide ] button to turn the camera Camera Basics ] button. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose the destination. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the icon of the Web service to connect to, and then press the [ ] button. P Mode ●● If multiple recipients or sharing options are used with a Web service, choose the desired item on the [Select Recipient] screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 3 Send an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The Web service settings are now updated. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select], and then press the [ ] button. ●● If any configured settings change, follow these steps again to update the camera settings. Before Use Accessories Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, press the [ ] button to mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● When uploading to YouTube, read the terms of service, choose [I Agree], and press the [ ] button. 105 ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. ●● After the image is sent, [OK] is displayed. Press the [ ] button to return to the playback screen. ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● You can also send multiple images at once, resize images, and add comments before sending (= 109). ●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on the screen in step 3. ●● We recommend using the dedicated application Canon Online Photo Album when viewing images sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on a smartphone. Search for the Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store for iPhone and iPad, or in Google Play for Android smartphones, and download and install the app. Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer Connect the camera to a printer via Wi-Fi to print as follows. These steps show how to use the camera as an access point, but you can also use an existing access point (= 96). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 94). 2 Choose [ Other Shooting Modes P Mode ]. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 3 Choose [Add a Device]. Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● The camera’s SSID is displayed. 106 4 Connect the printer to the network. ●● In the printer’s Wi-Fi setting menu, choose the SSID (network name) displayed on the camera to establish a connection. 5 Choose the printer. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printer name, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off]. ●● To use another access point, follow steps 3 – 4 in “Using Another Access Point” (= 96). Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 6 Choose an image to print. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ press the [ ] button again. Wi-Fi Functions ], and Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● For detailed printing instructions, see “Printing Images” (= 133). ●● To end the connection, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons on the confirmation screen to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index 107 Sending Images to Another Camera Connect two cameras via Wi-Fi and send images between them as follows. ●● Only Canon-brand cameras equipped with a Wi-Fi function can be connected to wirelessly. You cannot connect to a Canon-brand camera that does not have a Wi-Fi function, even if it supports Eye-Fi cards. 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu. ●● Access the Wi-Fi menu as described in step 2 in “Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi-Fi Menu” (= 94). 2 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose [Add a Device]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Add a Device], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Follow steps 1 – 3 on the target camera too. 4 Send an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image to send, press the [ ] button to mark it as selected ([ ]), and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. P Mode Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Playback Mode ●● Image transfer will begin. The screen darkens during image transfer. Wi-Fi Functions ●● [Transfer completed] is displayed after the image is sent, and the image transfer screen is displayed again. Setting Menu ●● To end the connection, press the ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons [ on the confirmation screen to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Camera connection information will be added when [Start connection on target camera] is displayed on both camera screens. 108 ●● Connections require that a memory card be in the camera. ●● Once you have connected to devices via the Wi-Fi menu, recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi-Fi menu. You can easily connect again by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device and then pressing the [ ] button. To add a new device, display the device selection screen by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then configure the setting. ●● If you prefer not to display recent target devices, choose MENU (= 27) > [ ] tab > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Target History] > [Off]. ●● You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending (= 109). ●● You can send the current image by choosing [Send this image] on the screen in step 4. Image Sending Options You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image recording pixel setting (size) before sending. Some Web services also enable you to annotate the images you send. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Sending Multiple Images Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode You can also select a range of images to send, or send all images tagged as favorites together, from the image sending screen. Other Shooting Modes 1 Choose [Select and send]. P Mode ●● On the image transfer screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Select and send], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 2 Choose a selection method. Accessories ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a selection method. Appendix Index Select a range 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple Images” (= 109), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. 109 2 Choose images. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 78) to specify images. ●● When also sending movies, choose [Incl. Movies] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Send the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. Sending Images Tagged as Favorites You can send all images tagged as favorites (= 83) together. 1 Choose [Favorites]. ●● You cannot choose [Favorites] in step 1 if no images are tagged as favorites. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Notes on Sending Images Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi-Fi antenna area (= 4). Covering this may decrease the speed of your image transfers. Other Shooting Modes ●● Depending on the condition of the network you are using, it may take a long time to send movies. Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level. P Mode ●● Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you can send. Playback Mode ●● When sending movies to smartphones, note that the supported image quality varies depending on the smartphone. For details, refer to the smartphone user manual. Wi-Fi Functions ●● Following step 2 in “Sending Multiple Images” (= 109), choose [Favorites] and press the [ ] button. ●● On the screen, wireless signal strength is indicated by the following icons. [ ] high, [ ] medium, [ ] low, [ ] weak ●● An image selection screen showing only images tagged as favorites is displayed. You can also not send the images if you press the [ ] button to remove [ ] after selecting images. ●● Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Send the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Send], and then press the [ ] button. 110 Choosing the Number of Recording Pixels (Image Size) On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. On the screen displayed, choose the recording pixel setting (image size) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. ●● To send images at original size, select [No] as the resizing option. ●● Choosing [ ] will resize images that are larger than the selected size before sending. ●● Movies cannot be resized. ●● Image size can also be configured in MENU (= 27) > [ > [Wi-Fi Settings] > [Resize for Sending]. ] tab Before Use Adding Comments Using the camera, you can add comments to images that you send to e-mail addresses, social networking services, etc. The number of characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Access the screen for adding Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode comments. ●● On the image transfer screen, choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Add a comment (= 28). 3 Send the image. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● When a comment is not entered, the comment set in CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent. ●● You can also annotate multiple images before sending them. The same comment is added to all images sent together. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 111 Sending Images Automatically (Image Sync) Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services. 2 Choose the type of images to send (only when sending movies with images). Before Use Basic Guide ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Image Sync], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Stills/Movies]. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Assign [ Initial Preparations ] to the [ ] button (only when sending images by pressing the [ ] button). Preparing the Camera Register [ ] as the destination. You can also assign [ ] to the [ ] button, so that you can simply press the [ ] button to send any unsent images on the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. 1 Add [ ] as a destination. ●● Add [ ] as a destination, as described in “Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY” (= 103). ●● If you are also uploading images to a Web service, log in to the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 103), choose your camera model, and then display the Web service configuration screen and choose the Web service you want to upload images to from the Image Sync settings. See the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help for more details. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● Clear the [ ] button setting if a smartphone is already assigned to the button (= 93). Playback Mode ●● Access the mobile connection screen as described in step 2 in “Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button” (= 93), press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Preparing the Computer Appendix Install and configure the software on the destination computer. Index 1 Install the software. ●● Install the software on a computer connected to the Internet (= 97). 2 Register the camera. ●● Windows: In the taskbar, right-click [ and then click [Add new camera]. ●● Mac OS: In the menu bar, click [ then click [Add new camera]. ], ], and 112 ●● A list of cameras linked to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY is displayed. Choose the camera from which images are to be sent. ●● Once the camera is registered and the computer is ready to receive images, the icon changes to [ ]. Sending Images Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer. If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off, the images will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server. Stored images are regularly erased, so make sure to turn on the computer and save the images. 1 Send images. ●● If you have already assigned [ ] to the [ ] button, press the [ ] button. ●● If you have not assigned the button this way, choose [ ] as described in steps 1 – 2 in “Uploading Images to Web Services” (= 105). ●● Images labeled with a [ ] icon have been sent. 2 Save the images to the computer. ●● Images are automatically saved to the computer when you turn it on. ●● Images are automatically sent to Web services from the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server, even if the computer is off. ●● When sending images, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 126). ●● Even if images were imported to the computer through a different method, any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer. ●● Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as the camera, because images are sent via the access point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY. Note that images stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY, so the computer must be connected to the Internet. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Viewing Images Sent via Image Sync on Your Smartphone Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Installing the Canon Online Photo Album (Canon OPA) on your smartphone allows you to view and download images sent by Image Sync and temporarily saved on CANON iMAGE GATEWAY on your smartphone. The following setup is required. Setting Menu Accessories ●● You must have completed configuration for “Preparing the Computer” (= 112). ●● Search for the Canon Online Photo Album in the App Store for iPhone and iPad, or in Google Play for Android smartphones, and download and install the app. Appendix Index ●● Log in to the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY (= 103), choose your camera model, and then display the Web service configuration screen and change the Image Sync settings so that you can browse or download from your smartphone. See the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Help for more details. 113 ●● Images deleted from CANON iMAGE GATEWAY can no longer be viewed after a certain time. ●● You cannot view images sent before you changed the Image Sync settings so that you can browse or download from your smartphone. ●● For details on using the Canon Online Photo Album, refer to the Canon Online Photo Album Help. Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control the Camera You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Camera Connect. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Geotag images on the camera (= 114) ●● Shoot remotely (= 115) Other Shooting Modes ●● Privacy settings must be configured in advance to allow image viewing on the smartphone (= 93, = 94, = 116). P Mode Playback Mode Geotagging Images on the Camera Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated Camera Connect application can be added to images on the camera. Images are tagged with information including the latitude, longitude, and elevation. ●● Before shooting, make sure the date and time and your home time zone are set correctly, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19). Also follow the steps in “World Clock” (= 119) to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones. ●● Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged still images or movies. Be careful when sharing these images with others, as when posting images online where many others can view them. Accessories Appendix Index 114 Shooting Remotely As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone, you can use it to shoot remotely. 1 ●● The camera works in [ ] mode during remote shooting. However, some FUNC. and MENU settings you have configured in advance may be changed automatically. ●● Movie shooting is not available. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Secure the camera. ●● Once remote shooting begins, the camera lens will come out. Lens motion from zooming may also move the camera out of position. Keep the camera still by mounting it on a tripod or taking other measures. Camera Basics ●● Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the connection environment will not affect recorded images. ●● No AF frames are displayed. Capture a test image to check the focus. ●● Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone. Use the smartphone to browse and import images from the camera. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode 2 Connect the camera and smartphone (= 93, = 94). Playback Mode ●● In the privacy settings, choose [Yes]. Wi-Fi Functions 3 Choose remote shooting. Setting Menu ●● In Camera Connect on the smartphone, choose remote shooting. Accessories ●● The camera lens will come out. Do not press near the lens, and make sure no objects will obstruct it. ●● Once the camera is ready for remote shooting, a live image from the camera will be displayed on the smartphone. Appendix Index ●● At this time, a message is displayed on the camera, and all operations except pressing the power button are disabled. 4 Shoot. ●● Use the smartphone to shoot. 115 Editing or Erasing Wi-Fi Settings Web Services Edit or erase Wi-Fi settings as follows. Editing Connection Information 1 Access the Wi-Fi menu and choose a device to edit. ●● Press the [ on. ●● Press the [ Before Use Connection Configurable Items ] button to turn the camera ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to access the device selection screen, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the icon of a device to edit, and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose [Edit a Device]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Edit a Device], and then press the [ ] button. [Change Device Nickname] (= 116) O O O O – [View Settings] (= 93) – O – – – [Erase Connection Info] (= 116) O O O O – Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode O : Configurable – : Not configurable Other Shooting Modes Changing a Device Nickname P Mode You can change the device nickname (display name) that is displayed on the camera. ●● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection Information” (= 116), choose [Change Device Nickname] and press the [ ] button. Playback Mode ●● Select the input field and press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new nickname (= 28). Setting Menu Wi-Fi Functions Accessories Appendix Erasing Connection Information Erase connection information (information about devices that you have connected to) as follows. 3 Choose the device to edit. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the device to edit, and then press the [ ] button. 4 Choose the item to edit. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the item to edit, and then press the [ button. ] ●● The items you can change depend on the device or service. Index ●● Following step 4 in “Editing Connection Information” (= 116), choose [Erase Connection Info] and press the [ ] button. ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The connection information will be erased. 116 Changing the Camera Nickname You can change the camera nickname displayed on the connected device. 1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Before Use Returning the Wi-Fi Settings to Default Basic Guide Return the Wi-Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera to another person, or dispose of it. Resetting the Wi-Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings. Be sure that you want to reset all Wi-Fi settings before using this option. Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Choose [Wi-Fi Settings]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Wi-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab (= 27). Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose [Change Device Nickname]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Change Device Nickname], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Change the device nickname. ●● Press the [ ] button. Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new nickname (= 28). P Mode 2 Choose [Reset Settings]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Reset Settings], and then press the [ button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ] Setting Menu Accessories 3 Restore the default settings. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index ●● The Wi-Fi settings are now reset. ●● A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with a symbol or space. Press the [ ] button and enter a different nickname. ●● You can change the nickname when using the Wi-Fi function for the first time by selecting the input field on the displayed [Device Nickname] screen, pressing the [ ] button, and using the keyboard displayed. ●● To reset other settings (aside from Wi-Fi) to defaults, choose [Reset All] on the [ ] tab (= 124). 117 Before Use Adjusting Basic Camera Functions Basic Guide Basic camera functions are configured on the [ ] tab of the MENU (= 27). Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience. Setting Menu Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience Advanced Guide Camera Basics Silencing Camera Operations Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Silence camera sounds and movies as follows. Other Shooting Modes ●● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On]. P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button as you turn the camera on. ●● Sound is not played during movies (= 69) if you mute camera sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button. Adjust volume with the [ ][ ] buttons, as needed. Accessories Appendix Index Adjusting the Volume Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows. ●● Choose [Volume], and then press the [ button. ] ●● Choose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume. 118 Before Use Hiding Hints and Tips World Clock Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 26) or MENU (= 27) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information. To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/Time setting manually. Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 19). ●● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose [Off]. 1 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Specify your destination. Other Shooting Modes ●● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the [ ] button. Date and Time ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. Adjust the date and time as follows. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the destination. ●● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the setting. P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Press the [ Setting Menu Accessories ] button. 2 Switch to the destination time zone. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ World], and then press the [ button. ] Appendix Index ●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 146). ●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 19) will automatically update your [ Home] time and date. 119 Lens Retraction Timing Power-Saving Adjustment The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the [ ] button in Shooting mode (= 24). To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.]. Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 25). ●● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then choose [0 sec.]. ●● Choose [Power Saving], and then press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● After choosing an item, press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust it as needed. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off]. Using Eco Mode This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Configure the setting. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off]. ●● These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode (= 120) to [On]. Setting Menu Accessories ●● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On]. ●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 146). Appendix Index ●● The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds; approximately ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity. 2 Shoot. ●● To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway. 120 Screen Brightness Formatting Memory Cards Adjust screen brightness as follows. Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you should format the card with this camera. Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. ●● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the brightness. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 1 Access the [Format] screen. ●● Choose [Format], and then press the [ button. ●● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original brightness, press and hold the [ ] button again for at least one second or restart the camera. Hiding the Start-Up Screen If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally shown when you turn the camera on. ●● Choose [Start-up Image], and then choose [Off]. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ] Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose [OK]. P Mode ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 3 Format the memory card. ●● To begin the formatting process, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● When formatting is finished, [Memory card formatting complete] is displayed. Press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards. ●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity. 121 Low-Level Formatting Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before lowlevel formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the camera assigns file numbers. ●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 121), because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card. ●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Choose [File Numbering], and then choose an option. ●● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 121), press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Low Level Format], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is displayed. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 121) to continue with the formatting process. Before Use File Numbering Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Continuous Auto Reset Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards. Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or when a new folder is created. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted, = 121) memory card. Accessories Appendix Index 122 Before Use Date-Based Image Storage Checking Certification Logos Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day. Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the camera packaging, or on the camera body. ●● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose [Daily]. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Choose [Certification Logo Display], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images will now be saved in folders created on the shooting date. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Metric / Non-Metric Display Change the unit of measurement shown in GPS elevation information (= 114), zoom bar (= 30) and elsewhere from m/cm to ft/in as needed. ●● Choose [Units], and then choose [ft/in]. P Mode Display Language Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Change the display language as needed. ●● Choose [Language the [ ] button. ], and then press Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Index ●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing ] button. the [ 123 Before Use Adjusting Other Settings The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab. ●● [Video System] (= 128) Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● [Wi-Fi Settings] (= 89) Camera Basics ●● [Mobile Device Connect Button] (= 93) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Restoring Default Camera Settings Other Shooting Modes If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings. 1 P Mode Access the [Reset All] screen. Playback Mode ●● Choose [Reset All], and then press the [ ] button. Wi-Fi Functions 2 Restore default settings. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories ●● Default settings are now restored. Appendix ●● The following functions are not restored to default settings. -- [ ] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 119), [Time Zone] (= 119), ] (= 123), and [Video System] (= 128) [Language -- Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 60) -- Shooting Mode -- Wi-Fi settings (= 89) Index 124 Before Use System Map Basic Guide Included Accessories Advanced Guide Accessories Wrist strap Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible accessories sold separately Camera Basics Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE*1 Battery Pack NB-6LH*1 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2 P Mode Memory Cards Card Reader Playback Mode Computer Wi-Fi Functions HDMI Cable (camera end: D-type)*3 Power Setting Menu Cables Accessories AV Cable AVC-DC400 AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 Flash Units TV/Video System PictBridge Compatible Printers Appendix Index High-Power Flash HF-DC2 *1 Also available for purchase separately. *2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC-400PCU). *3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2.5 m (8.2 ft.). 125 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. Optional Accessories The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Power Supplies Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Battery Pack NB-6LH ●● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery P Mode Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Playback Mode ●● Charger for Battery Pack NB-6LH Wi-Fi Functions ●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that that is not visible on an uncharged battery pack. ●● Battery Pack NB-6L is also supported. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 Index ●● For powering the camera using household power. Recommended when using the camera over extended periods, or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer. Cannot be used to charge the battery pack in the camera. 126 ●● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). ●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. Before Use Printers Basic Guide Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Even without using a computer, you can print images by connecting the camera directly to a printer. For details, visit your nearest Canon retailer. Flash Units Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes High-Power Flash HF-DC2 P Mode ●● External flash for illuminating subjects that are out of range of the built-in flash. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Other Accessories Setting Menu Accessories Interface Cable IFC-400PCU ●● For connecting the camera to a computer or printer. Appendix Index AV Cable AVC-DC400 ●● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy playback on the larger TV screen. 127 Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies ●● On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Playback on a TV Still Images Movies By connecting the camera to a TV, you can view your shots on the larger screen of the TV. For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual. ●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 147). Playback on a High-Definition TV Still Images Movies You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV with a commercially available HDMI cable (not exceeding 2.5 m, with a Type D terminal on the camera end). Movies shot at an image quality of [ ] or [ ] can be viewed in high definition. 1 Make sure the camera and TV are off. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Turn the TV on and switch to Other Shooting Modes external input. ●● Switch the TV input to the external input you connected the cable to in step 2. P Mode 4 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ on. Playback Mode ] button to turn the camera Wi-Fi Functions ●● Images from the camera are now displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) Setting Menu Accessories ●● When finished, turn off the camera and TV before disconnecting the cable. ●● Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an HDTV. Appendix Index 2 Connect the camera to the TV. ●● On the TV, insert the cable plug fully into the HDMI input as shown. 128 Playback on a Standard-Definition TV Still Images Movies Connecting the camera to a TV with the AV Cable AVC-DC400 (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV as you control the camera. 1 Make sure the camera and TV are off. ●● When the camera and TV are connected, you can also shoot while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV. To shoot, follow the same steps as when using the camera screen. However, AF-Point Zoom (= 43) is not available. Still Images ●● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the ] button and choose video output format, press the [ [Video System] on the [ ] tab. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Movies Other Shooting Modes P Mode 1 Make sure the camera is off. 2 Insert the coupler. Playback Mode ●● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 18) to open the cover. (1) ●● Follow steps 3 – 4 in “Playback on a High-Definition TV” (= 128) to display images. Advanced Guide Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 (sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level. ●● On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. 3 Display images. Basic Guide Powering the Camera with Household Power 2 Connect the camera to the TV. ●● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into the video inputs as shown. Before Use Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Holding the coupler with the terminals (1) facing as shown, insert the coupler just as you would a battery pack (following step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 18)). ●● Follow step 4 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 18) to close the cover. Accessories Appendix Index 3 Connect the adapter to the coupler. ●● Open the cover and insert the adapter plug fully into the coupler. 129 4 Connect the power cord. ●● Insert one end of the power cord into the compact power adapter, and then plug the other end into a power outlet. ●● Turn the camera on and use it as desired. ●● When finished, turn the camera off and unplug the power cord from the outlet. ●● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera. ●● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. Using the Software After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it on the computer you are using, you can do the following things. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● CameraWindow -- Save images to a computer Camera Basics ●● Image Transfer Utility -- Configure and receive images with Image Sync (= 112) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Map Utility -- Display GPS information recorded in images on a map Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● When viewing or editing images on a computer, always use software that supports the images shot on the camera (software normally installed on the computer or general-use software). Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 130 Computer Connections via a Cable ●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately. Checking Your Computer Environment The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. ●● Windows 8/8.1 ●● Windows 7 SP1 ●● Mac OS X 10.9 ●● Follow the steps below to uninstall (delete) the software. -- In Windows, click in the following order: [Start] menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the software you want to uninstall. -- In Mac OS, click on [Applications] folder , choose the [Canon Utilities] folder, drag the folder of the software you want to uninstall to the trash, and then empty the trash. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes ●● Mac OS X 10.8 When sending images to a computer via Wi-Fi, check the system requirements in “Checking Your Computer Environment” (= 97). P Mode Playback Mode Installing the Software Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration. 1 Download the software. Accessories ●● With a computer connected to the Internet, access http://www.canon.com/ icpd/. ●● Access the site for your country or region. Appendix Index ●● Download the software. 2 Install the files. ●● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. Installation may take some time, depending on computer performance and the Internet connection. ●● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen after installation. 131 ●● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon Camera] and then click [OK]. Saving Images to a Computer Basic Guide Connecting the camera to a computer with a commercial USB cable (the camera terminal is Mini-B) enables you to import your shots. 1 (2) (1) Before Use Advanced Guide Connect the camera to the computer. ●● With the camera turned off, open the cover (1). With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal (2). ●● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. 2 Turn the camera on to access CameraWindow. ●● Press the [ on. ] button to turn the camera ●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer. Camera Basics ●● Double-click [ Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ]. Other Shooting Modes 3 Save the images to the computer. P Mode ●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. Playback Mode ●● Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● After images are saved, close ] button to CameraWindow, press the [ turn the camera off, and unplug the cable. ●● When viewing imported images on a computer, always use software that supports the images shot on the camera (software normally installed on the computer or general-use software). Accessories Appendix Index ●● Windows: Follow the steps introduced below. ●● In the screen that is displayed, click the ]. change program link of [ 132 ●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the taskbar. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations apply. -- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible. -- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. -- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. -- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes. Before Use Printing Images Still Images Movies Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for photobooks. A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Easy Print P Mode Still Images Movies Playback Mode Connecting the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer with a commercial USB cable (the camera terminal is Mini-B) enables you to print your shots. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu 1 Make sure the camera and printer are off. Accessories 2 Connect the camera to the printer. ●● Open the terminal cover. Holding the smaller cable plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal. Appendix Index ●● Connect the larger cable plug to the printer. For other connection details, refer to the printer manual. 133 3 Turn the printer on. 4 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ on. Still Images ] button to turn the camera Movies 1 Access the printing screen. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 133) to access this screen. 5 Choose an image. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. 6 Access the printing screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ press the [ ] button again. Before Use Configuring Print Settings Other Shooting Modes P Mode ], and Default Date File No. Both 7 Print the image. Off Default Off ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Printing now begins. ●● To print other images, repeat the above procedures starting from step 5 after printing is finished. On RedEye 1 No. of Copies ●● When you are finished printing, turn the camera and printer off and disconnect the cable. ●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see “Printers” (= 127). Cropping – Paper Settings – Matches current printer settings. Prints images with the date added. Prints images with the file number added. Prints images with both the date and file number added. – Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Matches current printer settings. – Uses information from the time of shooting to print under optimal settings. Corrects red-eye. Appendix Index Choose the number of copies to print. Specify a desired image area to print (= 135). Specify the paper size, layout, and other details (= 135). 134 Cropping Images before Printing Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing Still Images Movies By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image. 1 Choose [Cropping]. ●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 134) to access the printing screen, choose [Cropping] and press the [ ] button. ●● A cropping frame is now displayed, indicating the image area to print. 2 Adjust the cropping frame as Still Images Movies 1 Choose [Paper Settings]. ●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 134) to access the printing screen, choose [Paper Settings] and press the [ ] button. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose a paper size. Other Shooting Modes ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. P Mode needed. Playback Mode ●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. ●● To rotate the frame, press the [ Wi-Fi Functions 3 Choose a type of paper. ●● To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. ] button. ] button, press the ●● Press the [ [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Print the image. ●● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 133) to print. ●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios. ●● Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with ] selected. [Date Stamp Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix 4 Choose a layout. ●● Press the [ option. ][ Index ] buttons to choose an ●● When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the number of images per sheet. ●● Press the [ ] button. 5 Print the image. 135 Available Layout Options Default Bordered Borderless N-up ID Photo Fixed Size Before Use Printing Movie Scenes Matches current printer settings. Prints with blank space around the image. Borderless, edge-to-edge printing. Choose how many images to print per sheet. Prints images for identification purposes. Only available for images with a recording pixel setting of L and an aspect ratio of 4:3. Choose the print size. Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints. Still Images ●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 133) to choose a movie. This screen is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing method. 1 Choose [ID Photo]. 2 Choose the long and short side length. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item. Choose the length by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose the printing area. ●● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before Printing” (= 135) to choose the printing area. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes 2 Choose a printing method. Movies ●● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing” (= 135), choose [ID Photo] and press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Access the printing screen. Printing ID Photos Still Images Movies P Mode ], Playback Mode 3 Print the image. Wi-Fi Functions Movie Printing Options Single Sequence Prints the current scene as a still image. Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On]. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● To cancel printing in progress, press the [ ] button, choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models. 4 Print the image. 136 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Movies Batch printing (= 138) and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards. Configuring Print Settings Still Images Movies Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab. Choose and configure items as desired (= 27). ●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer or photo development service, in some cases. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. ●● Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date twice. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File No.] at the same time. ●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately). ●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/ Time] on the [ ] tab (= 19). Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Up Printing for Individual Images Still Images Setting Menu Movies Accessories 1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.]. Standard Print Type Index Both Date File No. Clear DPOF data On Off On Off On Off One image is printed per sheet. Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet. Both standard and index formats are printed. Images are printed with the shooting date. – Images are printed with the file number. – All image print list settings are cleared after printing. – ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. Appendix Index 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can now specify the number of copies. ●● If you specify index printing for the image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel index printing for the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 137 3 Specify the number of prints. Clearing All Images from the Print List ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the number of prints (up to 99). ●● To set up printing for other images and specify the number of prints, repeat steps 2 – 3. ●● Printing quantity cannot be specified for index prints. You can only choose which images to print, by following step 2. ●● When finished, press the [ to return to the menu screen. ] button Still Images ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 137), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. Movies ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 137), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 78) to specify images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Order], and then press the [ ] button. Basic Guide Advanced Guide ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images Before Use Other Shooting Modes Movies P Mode ●● When images have been added to the print list (= 137 – = 138), this screen is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now], and then simply press the [ ] button to print the images in the print list. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu ●● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily stop will be resumed from the next image. Accessories Appendix Setting Up Printing for All Images Still Images Movies Index ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 137), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 138 2 Choose an image. Adding Images to a Photobook Still Images Movies Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer. Choosing a Selection Method ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and then choose how you will select images. Before Use ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● [ ] is displayed. ●● To remove the image from the photobook, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● When finished, press the [ to return to the menu screen. Other Shooting Modes ] button P Mode Adding All Images to a Photobook Still Images Movies Playback Mode ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 139), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. Still Images 1 Movies Choose [Select]. ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 139), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. Setting Menu ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Accessories Appendix Removing All Images from a Photobook Adding Images Individually Wi-Fi Functions Still Images Movies Index ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 139), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 139 Troubleshooting If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Appendix Helpful information when using the camera Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Power Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Nothing happens when the power button is pressed. ●● ●● ●● ●● Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 17). Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 18). Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 18). Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode The battery pack runs out of power quickly. ●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch any metal objects. ●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. ●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories The lens is not retracted. ●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 18). Appendix Index The battery pack is swollen. ●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Display on a TV Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (= 128). 140 Shooting No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway. Cannot shoot. ●● In Playback mode (= 69), press the shutter button halfway (= 25). ●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. Strange display on the screen under low light (= 26). Subjects in shots look too dark. Strange display on the screen when shooting. ●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies. -- The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED lighting. No date stamp is added to images. ●● Configure the [Date Stamp ] setting (= 39). Note that date stamps are not added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/ Time] setting (= 19). ●● Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (= 151) in which ] cannot be configured (= 39). [Date Stamp [ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting is not possible (= 33). [ ] is displayed on the screen when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 33). ●● ●● ●● ●● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 44). Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 66). Increase the ISO speed (= 59). Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 44). Shots are out of focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down to shoot (= 25). ●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 158). ●● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 45). ●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated. ●● ●● ●● ●● Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 66). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 58). Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 59, = 86). Use spot metering (= 58). Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out. ●● ●● ●● ●● Other Shooting Modes Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 30). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 58). Use spot metering (= 58). Reduce the lighting on subjects. P Mode Playback Mode Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 33). ●● Shoot within flash range (= 158). ●● Increase the ISO speed (= 59). Wi-Fi Functions Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out. ●● Shoot within flash range (= 158). ●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ Setting Menu ] (= 30). Accessories White spots appear in flash shots. ●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles. Appendix Shots look grainy. ●● Lower the ISO speed (= 59). ●● High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images (= 49). Index Subjects are affected by red-eye (= 41). ●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 45). Note that while the red-eye reduction lamp (= 4) is lit (for about one second), it is not possible to shoot, because the lamp is counteracting red-eye. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range. ●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 86). 141 Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is slower. ●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 122). Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available. ●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (= 148 – = 151). Shooting Movies Sound is not played during movies. ●● Adjust the volume (= 118) if you have activated [Mute] (= 118) or the sound in the movie is faint. ●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] mode (= 51) because audio is not recorded in this mode. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Memory Card Camera Basics The memory card is not recognized. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 24). The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted. ●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (= 121, = 157). [ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically. ●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures. -- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 122). -- Lower the image quality (= 42). -- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 157). Zooming is not possible. ●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] mode (= 51). Subjects look distorted. ●● Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted. This is not a malfunction. Playback Playback is not possible. ●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or alter the folder structure. Other Shooting Modes Computer P Mode Cannot transfer images to a computer. ●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer speed as follows. ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] button -- Press the [ down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Wi-Fi Cannot access the Wi-Fi menu by pressing the [ Accessories ] button. ●● The Wi-Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode. Switch to Playback mode and try again. ●● In Playback mode, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during detailed information display, magnified display, or index display. Switch to single-image display and a viewing mode other than detailed information display. Similarly, the Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to specified conditions. Cancel group or filtered image playback. ●● The Wi-Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer, computer, or TV via a cable. Disconnect the cable. Appendix Index Playback stops, or audio skips. ●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the camera (= 122). ●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds. ●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate. 142 Cannot add a device/destination. ●● A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera. Erase unneeded connection information from the camera first, and then add new devices/destinations (= 116). ●● Use a computer or smartphone to register Web services (= 103). ●● To add a smartphone, first install the dedicated application Camera Connect on your smartphone (= 90). ●● To add a computer, first install the software CameraWindow on your computer. Also check your computer and Wi-Fi environment and settings (= 97, = 99). ●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 GHz band. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. Images take a long time to send./The wireless connection is disrupted. ●● Multiple images may take a long time to send. Try resizing the image to reduce sending time (= 111). ●● Movies may take a long time to send. ●● Do not use the camera near sources of Wi-Fi signal interference, such as microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, or other equipment operating on the 2.4 ] is GHz band. Note that images may take a long time to send even when [ displayed. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Want to erase Wi-Fi connection information before disposing of the camera or giving it to someone else. Other Shooting Modes ●● Reset the Wi-Fi settings (= 117). P Mode Cannot connect to the access point. ●● Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera (= 156). Note that instead of auto channel assignment, it is advisable to specify a supported channel manually. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Cannot send images. ●● The destination device has insufficient storage space. Increase the storage space on the destination device and resend the images. ●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. ●● Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent using Image Sync via an access point (= 112). Before moving or renaming these image files or folders on the computer, make sure the images have already been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services. Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index Cannot resize images for sending. ●● Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the recording pixel setting of their original size. ●● Movies cannot be resized. 143 On-Screen Messages If an error message is displayed, respond as follows. Shooting or Playback Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Unselectable image ●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) functions are not available for movies. Magnify (= 75)*, Smart Shuffle (= 76)*, Rotate (= 81)*, Favorites (= 83), Edit (= 84)*, Print List (= 137)* and Photobook Set-up(= 139)* Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Invalid selection range No memory card ●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card facing the correct way (= 18). ●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 78, = 81, = 138), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa. Exceeded selection limit ●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a memory card facing the correct way (= 18). ●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 137) or Photobook Set-up (= 139). Choose 998 images or less. ●● Print List (= 137) or Photobook Set-up (= 139) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again. ●● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 77), Erase (= 79), Favorites (= 83), Print List (= 137), or Photobook Set-up (= 139). Memory card error (= 122) Naming error! Memory card locked ●● The write-protect switch of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect switch to the unlocked position (= 18). Cannot record! ●● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported memory card (= 2) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 18), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Insufficient space on card ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 30, = 47, = 57) or edit images (= 84). Either erase unneeded images (= 79) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 18). Charge the battery (= 17) No Image. ●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed. Protected! (= 77) Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large/Cannot play back (MOV) ●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed. ●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions ●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (= 122), or format the memory card (= 121). Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Lens Error ●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Index A camera error was detected (error number) ●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. 144 File Error ●● Correct printing (= 133) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is connected to the printer. Print error ●● Check the paper size setting (= 135). If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again. Ink absorber full ●● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement. Wi-Fi Connection failed ●● No access points were recognized. Check the access point settings (= 99). ●● A device could not be found. Turn the camera off and on again, and retry the connection. ●● Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection. Disconnected/Receiving failed/Sending failed ●● You may be in an environment where Wi-Fi signals are obstructed. ●● Avoid using the camera’s Wi-Fi function around microwave ovens, Bluetooth devices, and other devices that operate on the 2.4 GHz band. ●● Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to (such as the access point), and make sure there are no objects between the devices. ●● Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors. IP address conflict ●● Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive images. Erase images to create space on the memory card, or insert a memory card with sufficient space. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Receiving failed Memory card locked No access points found ●● Check the access point security settings (= 99). Camera Basics Receiving failed Insufficient space on card Receiving failed Naming error! Incorrect password/Incorrect Wi-Fi security settings Advanced Guide ●● If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ●● The write-protect switch of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is set to the locked position. Slide the write-protect switch to the unlocked position. ●● Check to make sure that the access point is turned on. ●● When connecting to an access point manually, make sure that you entered the correct SSID. Basic Guide Sending failed Memory card error Cannot determine access point ●● The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously. Try reconnecting again. Before Use ●● When the highest folder number (999), and the highest image number (9999) have been reached on the receiving camera, images cannot be received. Insufficient space on server Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create space. ●● Save the images sent via Image Sync (= 112) to your computer. Check network settings ●● Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current network settings. 145 On-Screen Information Shooting (Information Display) (28) (29) (9) (10)(11)(12) (13) (14) (15) (20) Red-eye correction (= 41) (27) ISO speed (= 59) (21) Date stamp (= 39) (28) Zoom bar (= 30) (22) Shutter speed (29) IS mode icon (= 35) (23) Spot frame (= 58) (30) Blink detection (= 43) (24) Aperture value (31) Auto zoom (= 36) (25) Exposure compensation level (= 58) (32) Time zone (= 119) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics (33) Image stabilization (= 44) Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode (26) i-Contrast (= 59) * In [ ] mode, indicates the number of shots available. Other Shooting Modes (30) (1) (3) (16) (17) (18) (4) (19) (5) (20) (2) (31) Battery Level P Mode An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level. Display Playback Mode Details Sufficient charge (6) Wi-Fi Functions Slightly depleted, but sufficient (7) (21) (8) (32) (33) (Blinking red) [Charge the battery] (22)(23) Setting Menu Accessories (24) (25) (26)(27) (1) Battery level (= 146) (11) Self-timer (= 37) (2) White balance (= 60) (12) Movie quality (= 42) (3) My Colors (= 60) (13) Remaining time (= 157) (4) Drive mode (= 40) (5) Eco mode (= 120) (14) Zoom magnification (= 36), Digital tele-converter (= 63) (6) Grid lines (= 42) (15) Focus range (= 62) (7) Camera shake warning (= 33) (8) Metering method (= 58) (16) Shooting mode (= 148), Scene icon (= 34) (9) Still image compression (= 67), Recording pixel setting (= 41) (10) Recordable shots (= 157)* Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon. Depleted. Charge the battery immediately. Appendix Index (17) AF Frame (= 63) (18) Hybrid Auto mode (= 32) (19) Flash mode (= 66) 146 (24) Image editing (= 84) Playback (Detailed Information Display) (25) White balance (= 60) (26) Red-eye correction (= 41, = 86) Before Use Basic Guide (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)(13) (14) ●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 128). (1) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (24) (25)(26) (13) Image Sync (= 112) (1) Movies (= 30, = 69), Highspeed burst (= 56) (2) My Colors (= 60, = 85) (3) Histogram (= 71) (4) Group playback (= 74) (15) Current image no. / Total no. of images (5) Compression (image quality) (= 67) / Recording pixel setting (= 41), MP4 (movies) (16) Shutter speed (still images), Image quality / Frame rate (movies) (= 42) (14) Folder number - File number (= 122) Protection (= 77) (17) Aperture value (7) Favorites (= 83) (18) Flash (= 66) (8) Exposure compensation level (= 58) (20) Focus range (= 62) (6) (9) ISO speed (= 59), Playback speed (= 52) (19) i-Contrast (= 59, = 86) (21) File size (11) Metering method (= 58) (22) Still images: Recording pixel setting (= 157) Movies: Playback time (= 157) (12) Battery level (= 146) (23) Shooting date/time (= 19) (10) Shooting mode (= 148) Advanced Guide Camera Basics Summary of Movie Control Panel Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode The following operations are available on the movie control panel, accessed as described in “Viewing” (= 69). Other Shooting Modes Exit Playback P Mode Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback speed. No sound is played.) Playback Mode Skip Backward* or Previous Clip (= 88) (To continue skipping backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Wi-Fi Functions Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ button.) Setting Menu Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] ] button.) Accessories Skip Forward* or Next Clip (= 88) (To continue skipping forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Erase Clip (displayed when a digest movie is selected, = 88) Edit (= 87) Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-compatible printer (= 133). Appendix Index * Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame. ●● During movie playback, you can skip back or forward (or to the previous or next clip) by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 147 Before Use Functions and Menu Tables Basic Guide Advanced Guide Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode Camera Basics Shooting Mode Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Function Exposure Compensation (= 58) Flash (= 66) – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O – Other Shooting Modes O – O – O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O – – – O *1 O O – – O O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O – – – O – O – O P Mode *1 O O O O O O O *1 O O – – O O – – O O – – – O – – O O O O O O O O O O – – – O – – – O – – – O O O O O O – O O O O O O O – – O O – – O O – – O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – O O O O O Setting Menu Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Focus Range (= 62) Tracking AF Select Subject (= 64) Switch Display of Shot Information (= 26) *1 Not available, but switches to [ Accessories Appendix ] in some cases. Index 148 Before Use FUNC. Menu Basic Guide Shooting Mode Advanced Guide Function Metering Method (= 58) Camera Basics My Colors (= 60) 1 1 * * * White Balance (= 60) 2 ISO Speed (= 59) AUTO 80 / 100 / 200 / 400 / 800 / 1600 / 3200 Self-Timer (= 37) Self-Timer Settings (= 38) Delay*3 Shots*4 Drive Mode (= 40) O – O – O – O O O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O O O – O O O O O O O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O O O – O – O – O O O – O O O O O O O O O – O O O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O O O – O – O – O O O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O O O O O O – – – – – – – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O O O O O O O – O – O – – O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index *1 White balance is not available. *2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone. *3 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots. *4 One shot (cannot be modified) in modes without selection of the number of shots. 149 Before Use Shooting Mode Function Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 40) Recording Pixels (= 41) Basic Guide – – O O O O O O – – – – *1 – O O O O O O O – – – O – – – O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O O O – O – – O – O – – – – – O – O – – – O – – – O – – – O – – – O – – – O – – – O O – O O O – O O O – O – O – O – O O O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O O O O O O – O O O O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Compression (= 67) P Mode Playback Mode Movie Quality (= 42) Auto Zoom (= 36) *2 – Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu *1 Only [ ] and [ ] are available. *2 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 52). Accessories Appendix Index 150 Before Use Shooting Tab Basic Guide Shooting Mode Advanced Guide Function AF Frame (= 63) Face AiAF Tracking AF Center AF Frame Size (= 63)*1 Standard Small Digital Zoom (= 36) Standard Off 1.6x/2.0x AF-Point Zoom (= 43) On Off Servo AF (= 65) On Off Continuous AF (= 66) On Off *1 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center]. *2 [On] when subject movement is detected in [ Camera Basics O – – O – – O – – O O O O O O O – – O – – O – – O O O O – – O O O – – O – – – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – O O O O Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode – – – – – – O O O O – – – – – – O O – – O O O – – – O O O O O O O O O O – – O O P Mode O O – – O – O O – O O O O O – O O – O O – O O – – O – – O – – O – – O – – O – – O – – O – – O – – O – O O – O O – O O – – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O – O – O – O O O O O O O O O – O O O – O – O – *2 O O O O – O – O – O – O – O O O – O – O – O O O O O O O O O – O – O O – O – O – O O O O O – O – O – O – O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O Other Shooting Modes Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ] mode. 151 Before Use Shooting Mode Function AF-assist Beam (= 45) On Off Flash Settings (= 41, = 45) On Red-Eye Corr. Off Red-Eye Lamp On/Off i-Contrast (= 59) Auto Off Review image after shooting (= 46) Off/Quick Display Time 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / hold Not displayed Display Info Detailed Blink Detection (= 43) On Off Grid Lines (= 42) On/Off IS Settings (= 44) Off On Image Stabilization Shoot Only 1 Dynamic IS 2 Basic Guide Advanced Guide O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – – – O O O O O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O – O O O O O – – – O O O Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode O – – O O – O O – O – O – O – O O – – O O – – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O P Mode O O O O – O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O O O – O – O – O – O O O O O O O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O – O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Camera Basics Other Shooting Modes Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 152 Before Use Shooting Mode Function Date Stamp (= 39) Off Date/Date + Time Digest Type (= 32) Include Stills/No Stills Basic Guide O O O – O O O O O O O O O O O O O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O – O O O O O O O – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 153 Set Up Tab Before Use Playback Tab Basic Guide Item Reference Page Item Reference Page Mute = 118 List/Play Digest Movies = 72 Volume = 118 Slideshow = 75 Hints & Tips = 119 Erase = 79 Date/Time = 19 Protect = 77 Time Zone = 119 Rotate = 81 Lens Retraction = 120 Favorites = 83 Eco Mode = 120 Photobook Set-up = 139 P Mode Playback Mode Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes Power Saving = 25, = 120 i-Contrast = 86 LCD Brightness = 121 Red-Eye Correction = 86 Start-up Image = 121 Cropping = 84 Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Format = 121, = 122 Resize = 84 File Numbering = 122 My Colors = 85 Create Folder = 123 Transition = 69 Accessories Units = 123 Scroll Display = 69 Appendix Video System = 128 Group Images = 74 Wi-Fi Settings = 89 Auto Rotate = 82 Mobile Device Connect Button = 93 Resume = 69 Certification Logo Display = 123 Language = 20 Reset All = 124 Index 154 Print Tab Handling Precautions Item Print Reference Page – ●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact. Select Images & Qty. = 137 Select Range = 138 Select All Images = 138 ●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields. This may cause malfunction or erase image data. Clear All Selections = 138 Print Settings = 137 Playback Mode FUNC. Menu Item Reference Page Rotate = 81 Protect = 77 Favorites = 83 Erase = 79 Print = 133 Group Playback = 74 Play Movie = 69 Play Linked Digest Movie = 72 Smart Shuffle = 76 Image Search = 73 Slideshow = 75 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force. Other Shooting Modes ●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen. P Mode ●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Playback Mode ●● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag. ●● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately. Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use. ●● Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container. To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for some time, about once a year charge it and then use the camera until it runs out of power before storing the battery pack. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 155 Specifications Wi-Fi Standards Camera Specifications Camera Effective Pixels (Max.) Lens Focal Length LCD Monitor File Format Data Type Interface Power Source Dimensions (Based on CIPA Guidelines) Approx. 20.2 million pixels 18x zoom: 4.5 (W) ‒ 81.0 (T) mm (35mm film equivalent: 25 (W) – 450 (T) mm) 3.0-type color TFT LCD Effective pixels: approx. 922,000 dots Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1) compliant Still images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Movies: MP4 (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC (Monaural)) Hi-speed USB HDMI output Analog audio output (Monaural) Analog video output (NTSC/PAL) Battery Pack NB-6LH AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC40 105.3 x 61.0 x 26.7 mm (4.15 x 2.40 x 1.05 in.) Transmission Methods Communication Modes Before Use IEEE 802.11b/g/n* * 2.4 GHz band only OFDM modulation (IEEE 802.11g/n) DSSS modulation (IEEE 802.11b) Infrastructure mode*1, Ad hoc mode*2 *1 Supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup *2 Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS Supported Channels 1-11 ch Security WEP, WPA-PSK (AES/TKIP), WPA2-PSK (AES/TKIP) Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm film equivalent) Digital Zoom [Standard] Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x Playback Mode 25 ‒ 1800 mm (Represents the combined focal length of optical and digital zoom.) 40.0 ‒ 720 mm 50.0 ‒ 900 mm Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index Approx. 191 g (approx. 6.74 oz.; including the Weight (Based on battery pack/batteries and memory card) CIPA Guidelines) Approx. 167 g (approx. 5.89 oz.; camera body only) 156 Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time Number of Shots Approx. 270 shots Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Movie Recording Time*1 Movie Recording Time (Continuous Shooting*2) Playback Time*3 Approx. 400 shots Approx. 1 hr. Approx. 1 hr. 30 min. Approx. 5 hr. *1 Times are under the following shooting conditions. - AUTO mode - Image quality [ ] - Repeated shooting, stopping, zooming, turning power on/off *2 Times are under the following shooting conditions. - AUTO mode - Image quality [ ] - No operations such as zooming - Shooting immediately resumed after automatically stopping when the file size reaches 4GB or the recording time reaches 29 min. 59 sec. *3 Time for still images played back in a slideshow. ●● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA). ●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above. ●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack. Number of Shots per Memory Card Number of Recording Pixels Compression Ratio Before Use Number of Shots per Memory Card (Approx. shots) 16 GB (Large) 20M/5184 x 3888 1680 (Medium 1) 10M/3648 x 2736 3217 Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2729 Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode 5061 9344 (Medium 2) 3M/2048 x 1536 Other Shooting Modes 16755 P Mode 53992 (Small) 0.3M/640 x 480 80988 Playback Mode ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Recording Time per Memory Card Image Quality Accessories Recording Time per Memory Card 16 GB Appendix 1 hr. 08 min. 34 sec. 3 hr. 58 min. 01 sec. Index 8 hr. 25 min. 48 sec. ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. ●● Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in [ ] [ ], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [ ]. ●● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 10 or higher memory cards are recommended. 157 Flash Range Battery Pack NB-6LH Maximum wide angle ( Maximum telephoto ( ) 50 cm – 3.5 m (1.6 – 11 ft.) 1.0 – 2.0 m (3.3 – 6.6 ft.) ) Shooting Range Shooting Mode Focus Range – Other modes * Maximum Wide Angle ( ) 5 cm ‒ ∞ (2.0 in. ‒ infinity) 5 cm ‒ ∞ (2.0 in. ‒ infinity) 5 – 50 cm (2.0 in. – 1.6 ft.) Maximum Telephoto ( ) 1.0 m – ∞ (3.3 ft. – infinity) 1.0 m ‒ ∞ (3.3 ft. ‒ infinity) – Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Nominal Voltage: DC 3.7 V Nominal Capacity: 1060 mAh Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Battery Charger CB-2LY/CB-2LYE Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz), 0.085 A (100 V) – 0.05 A (240 V) Rated Output: DC 4.2 V, 0.7 A Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. (when using NB-6LH) Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (twoindicator system) Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Other Shooting Modes P Mode Playback Mode * Not available in some shooting modes. Wi-Fi Functions Continuous Shooting Speed Shooting Mode Setting Menu Speed Accessories Approx. 2.5 shots/sec. Approx. 7.2 shots/sec. Shutter Speed [ ] mode, automatically set range Appendix Index 1 –1/2000 sec. Aperture f/number f/3.8 / f/11 (W), f/6.9 / f/20 (T) * Depending on the zoom position, some aperture values may not be available. 158 Index A AC adapter kit 126, 129 Accessories 126 AF frames 63 Aspect ratio 40 AUTO mode (shooting mode) 21, 30 AV cable 129 B Batteries → Date/time (date/time battery) Power saving 25 Battery charger 2, 126 Battery pack Charging 17 Eco mode 120 Level 146 Power saving 25 Black and white images 61 Blink detection 43 C Camera Reset all 124 Camera access point mode 97 Camera Connect 90 CameraWindow 97, 130 CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 89, 103 Center (AF frame mode) 65 Clock 29 Color (white balance) 60 Compression ratio (image quality) 67 Connecting via an access point 99 Exposure Compensation 58 Continuous shooting High-speed burst (shooting mode) 56 Creative Shot 47 Cropping 84, 135 Custom white balance 60 D Date/time Adding date stamps 39 Changing 19 Date/time battery 20 Settings 19 World clock 119 DC coupler 129 Defaults → Reset all Digital tele-converter 63 Digital zoom 36 Display language 20 DPOF 137 E Eco mode 120 Editing Cropping 84 i-Contrast 86 My Colors 85 Red-eye correction 86 Resizing images 84 Editing or erasing connection information 116 Erasing 79 Error messages 144 F Face AiAF (AF frame mode) 63 Face self-timer (shooting mode) 54 Favorites 83 File numbering 122 Fireworks (shooting mode) 49 Fish-eye effect (shooting mode) 51 Flash On 67 Slow synchro 67 Focusing AF frames 63 AF-point zoom 43 Servo AF 65 Focusing range Macro 62 Focus lock 65 FUNC. menu Basic operations 26 Table 149, 155 G Grid lines 42 H Handheld nightscene (shooting mode) 49 HDMI cable 128 High-speed burst (shooting mode) 56 Household power 129 Hybrid Auto (shooting mode) 32 I i-Contrast 59, 86 Image quality → Compression ratio (image quality) Images Display period 46 Erasing 79 Playback → Viewing Protecting 77 Image stabilization 44 Image Sync 112 Indicator 29, 45 ISO speed 59 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode L Playback Mode Long shutter (shooting mode) 55 Low light (shooting mode) 49 Wi-Fi Functions M Macro (focus range) 62 Magnified display 75 Memory cards 2 Recording time 157 Menu Basic operations 27 Table 148 Metering method 58 Miniature effect (shooting mode) 51 Mobile Device Connection 93 Monochrome (shooting mode) 53 Movies Editing 87 Image quality (resolution/frame rate) 42 Recording time 157 My Colors 60, 85 Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index 159 N Neck strap → Strap P P (shooting mode) 57 Package contents 2 Photobook set-up 139 PictBridge 127, 133 Playback → Viewing Portrait (shooting mode) 49 Poster effect (shooting mode) 50 Power 126 → AC adapter kit,→ Battery charger,→ Battery pack Power saving 25 Printing 133 Program AE 57 Protecting 77 R Recording pixels (image size) 41 Red-eye correction 41, 86 Remote shooting 115 Reset all 124 Resizing images 84 Rotating 81 S Saving images to a computer 97, 132 Screen Display language 20 Icons 146, 147 Menu → FUNC. menu, Menu SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards → Memory cards Searching 73 Self-timer 37 2-second self-timer 38 Customizing the self-timer 38 Face self-timer (shooting mode) 54 Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 54 Sending images 109 Sending images to a computer 97 Sending images to another camera 108 Sending images to a printer 106 Sending images to a smartphone 90 Sending images to Web services 105 Sepia tone images 61 Servo AF 65 Shooting Shooting date/time → Date/time Shooting information 146 Slideshow 75 Smart Shuffle 76 Smart Shutter (shooting mode) 53 Smile (shooting mode) 53 Snow (shooting mode) 49 Software Installation 97 Saving images to a computer 97, 132 Sounds 118 Stereo AV cable 127, 128, 129 Strap 2, 16 Super vivid (shooting mode) 50 Traveling with the camera 119 Troubleshooting 140 TV display 128 Before Use V Advanced Guide Basic Guide Viewing 22 Image search 73 Index display 72 Magnified display 75 Single-image display 22 Slideshow 75 Smart Shuffle 76 TV display 128 Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes P Mode W Playback Mode White balance (color) 60 Wi-Fi functions 89 Wi-Fi menu 94 Wink self-timer (shooting mode) 54 World clock 119 Wi-Fi Functions Setting Menu Accessories Z Zoom 21, 31, 36 Appendix Index T Terminal 128, 129, 133 Toy camera effect (shooting mode) 52 Tracking AF 64 160 Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN) Precautions ●● -- ●● Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide. Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the guidelines noted in this guide. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in this guide. ●● Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode Radio Wave Interference Precautions ●● -- -- ●● According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations, export permission (or service transaction permission) from the Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or services (including this product) outside Japan. ●● Because this product includes American encryption software, it falls under U.S. Export Administration Regulations, and cannot be exported to or brought into a country under U.S. trade embargo. ●● Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use. The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased due to incorrect operation of the product, the effects of radio waves or static electricity, or accident or malfunction. Be sure to make notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution. Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content. ●● When transferring this product to another person, disposing of it, or sending it for repair, be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset the product to its default settings (erase settings) if necessary. Other Shooting Modes P Mode ●● This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio waves. To avoid interference, be sure to use this product as far away as possible from such devices, or avoid using the devices at the same time as this product. Playback Mode Wi-Fi Functions Security Precautions Setting Menu Because Wi-Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals, security precautions more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required. Keep the following points in mind when using Wi-Fi. ●● Only use networks you are authorized to use. This product searches for Wi-Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the results on the screen. Networks you are not authorized to use (unknown networks) may also be displayed. However, attempting to connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access. Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use, and do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks. Accessories Appendix Index ●● Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or theft of the product. Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product due to loss or theft of the product. 161 If security settings have not been properly set, the following problems may occur. ●● Transmission monitoring Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi-Fi transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending. ●● Unauthorized network access Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal, modify, or destroy information. Additionally, you could fall victim to other types of unauthorized access such as impersonation (where someone assumes an identity to gain access to unauthorized information) or springboard attacks (where someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems). To prevent these types of problems from occurring, be sure to thoroughly secure your Wi-Fi network. Only use this camera’s Wi-Fi function with a proper understanding of Wi-Fi security, and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security settings. The camera can print to PictBridge-compatible printers via Wi-Fi. PictBridge technical standards make it easy to connect digital cameras, printers, and other devices directly. Additionally, a new standard called DPS over IP enables PictBridge connections in network environments, and the camera is also compatible with this standard. Trademarks and Licensing Before Use ●● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Basic Guide ●● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Advanced Guide ●● App Store, iPhone, and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc. Camera Basics ●● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. Auto Mode / Hybrid Auto Mode ●● HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Other Shooting Modes ●● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Alliance®, WPA™, WPA2™ and Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. P Mode ●● The N-Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United States and in other countries. Playback Mode ●● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ●● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. Wi-Fi Functions ●● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard. Disclaimer Setting Menu Accessories Appendix Index ●● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited. ●● All measurements based on Canon testing standards. ●● Information subject to change without notice, as are product specifications and appearance. ●● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment. ●● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss arising from the use of this product. 162-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
Canon SX610 Handleiding
- Categorie
- Camera-accessoires
- Type
- Handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Canon SX610 User manual
Gerelateerde artikelen
Andere documenten
-
Sony CYBERSHOT DSC-W510 Handleiding
-
Minox DC 1222 Gebruikershandleiding
-
-
-
Samsung Galaxy Tab S4 Handleiding
-
Samsung Galaxy A40 Handleiding
-
Samsung Galaxy Tab Active Pro Handleiding
-
Samsung SM-T715Y Handleiding
-
Samsung Galaxy Tab S2 9.7 4G LTE Handleiding
-
Olympus OM-D E-M1 Handleiding